AWT 9TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER CREDIT & BILLING DEPARTMENTS, ANAHEIM, CA TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AUGUST 2, 2018

Transcription

1 CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER CREDIT & BILLING DEPARTMENTS, ANAHEIM, CA TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS AUGUST 2, 2018 ROBERT BORDERS & ASSOCIATES.

2 General Conditions AIA A201 by reference. TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Summary Border Contract Modification Procedures Border Payment Procedures Border Project Management and Coordination Border Construction Progress Documentation Border Submittal Procedures Border Quality Requirements Border References Border Temporary Facilities and Controls Border Product Requirements Border Execution Requirements Border Construction Waste Management Border Closeout Procedures Border Operation and Maintenance Data Border Project Record Documents Border Demonstration and Training Border DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION Selective Demolition Border DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS Interior Architectural Woodwork Border DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Building Insulation Border Joint Sealants Border DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS Steel Doors and Frames Border Aluminum Frames Border Flush Wood Doors Border Access Doors and Frames Border Door Hardware Allegion Glazing Border DIVISION 9 FINISHES Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing Border Gypsum Board Border Acoustical Panel Ceilings Border Resilient Tile Flooring Border Tile Carpeting Border Painting Border DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Signage Border Toilet Compartments Border TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

3 Toilet and Bath Accessories Border Fire Protection Specialties Border DIVISION 23 MECHANICAL HVAC Linwood DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Electrical General Provisions Linwood Basic Electrical Materials and Methods Linwood Low Voltage Systems Infrastructure Linwood Conduit and Wire Linwood Electrical Systems Commissioning Linwood Lighting Fixtures Linwood DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Access Controls Linwood City of Anaheim Cabling Spec City END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 2

4 SECTION SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Work phases. 4. Use of premises. 5. Owner's occupancy requirements. 6. Work restrictions. 7. Specification formats and conventions. 8. Pollution Control. 9. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: AWT 9th Floor Improvements, Call Center Credit & Billing Departments, Anaheim, CA. B. Project Location: 201 South Anaheim Blvd. Second Floor, Anaheim, California. C. Owner: City of Anaheim. D. Architect: Robert Borders & Associates Scenic Avenue, Suite 210, Costa Mesa, CA E. The Work consists of the following: 1. The Work includes AWT 9th Floor Improvements. 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. SUMMARY

5 1.5 WORK PHASES A. The Work shall be conducted in single phase. 1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing building, driveways, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct building, driveways, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. On-Site Work Hours: 1. Work shall be generally performed during normal business working hours of 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, except official City observed holidays. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify the Owner not less than two working days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Owner's written permission. 1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 49- division format and CSI's MasterFormat 2004 numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Technical Specifications are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Technical Specifications to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be SUMMARY

6 interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.9 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Provide positive methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of the soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from the construction operations STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) A. The contractor shall submit a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for approval by the City s Utility Department (OMUC). The plan shall show erosion control measures and indicate locations of staging, fueling, equipment and employee parking, and storage/stockpile locations. Locations for concrete washout shall be shown, as well as gravel site entrances and/or metal grates to keep soil from being deposited on City streets. The plan shall note that street sweeping shall occur as often as necessary, to ensure that no dirt or dust will remain on City streets. Drip pans shall be used under parked equipment and visqueen shall be shown on the plan to protect the soil in the fueling area. Only minor vehicle maintenance shall occur on-site. Maintenance shall occur in the fueling area and soil shall be protected by drip pans and visqueen. B. Prepare a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and file a Notice of Intent with the State Water Resources Control Board for this project. The SWPPP will provide Best Management Practice (BMP) methods and controls for wet weather grading activities and erosion control for both onsite and offsite improvements, in accordance with the requirements of the NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity. The SWPPP shall include an erosion control plan MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Noise Control: 1. The Contractor shall install noise reducing devices on construction equipment. Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the city and county having jurisdiction with regard to noise ordinances governing construction sites and activities. Construction Equipment noise at the Site shall be limited and only as permitted by applicable law, rule or regulation. B. Dust Control. 1. The Contractor shall be fully and solely responsible for maintaining and upkeeping all areas of the Site and adjoining areas, outdoors and indoors, free from flying debris, grinding powder, sawdust, dirt and dust as well as any other product, product waste or work waste, that by becoming airborne may cause respiratory inconveniences to persons and Owner s personnel. SUMMARY

7 2. Additionally, the Contractor shall take specific care to avoid deposits of airborne dust or airborne elements. Such protection devices, systems or methods shall be in accordance with the regulations set forth by the EPA and OSHA, and other applicable law, rule or regulation. 3. Additionally, the Contractor shall be the sole party responsible to regularly and routinely clean up and remove any and all deposits of dust and other elements. Damage and/or any liability derived from the Contractor s failure to comply with these requirements shall be exclusively at the cost of the Contractor, including, without limitation, any and all penalties that may be incurred for violations of applicable law, rule or regulation, and any amounts expended by the Owner to pay such damages shall be due and payable to the Owner on demand. 4. Contractor shall replace any damages property or part thereof and professionally clean any and all items that become covered or partially covered to any degree by dust or other airborne elements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION SUMMARY

8 SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Owner s Representative may issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, or Changes not affecting the Structural Safety, Access Compliance or Fire & Life Safety portions of the work, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions" or an equivalent form acceptable to Owner. 1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS (BULLETIN) A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: The Owner s Representative may issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

9 times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Owner s Representative may issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION (FIELD) CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: The Owner s Representative may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

10 SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Owner s Representative at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. No payment applications will be signed by the Owner s Representative prior to the Contractor submitting, and the Owner s Representative reviewing, a schedule of values. B. Format and Content: Use the Technical Specifications table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Owner s Representative. c. The Owner s Representative s project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

11 2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets or an equivalent form acceptable to Owner. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. 1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Technical Specifications table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Owner s Representative and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: 1. The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment or an equivalent form acceptable to Owner. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

12 D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Owner s Representative will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. E. Transmittal: Submit one signed original copy of each Application for Payment to Owner s Representative by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. The copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following (AIA Documents may be substituted with an equivalent form acceptable to Owner): 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. PAYMENT PROCEDURES

13 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION PAYMENT PROCEDURES

14 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Project meetings. 2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

15 C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Owner s Representative of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Owner s Representative, within three days of the meeting. 4. Frequency of Attendance by Owner s Representative: Limited by Owner s Representative /Owner Contract. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Owner s Representative, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Owner s Representative, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing, if any. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

16 h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises and existing site. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Owner s Representative of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

17 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Owner s Representative, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

18 a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.5 RFIs: A. General: 1. Contractor may submit a RFI to the Owner s Representative seeking clarification or interpretation of the contract documents. If in the Contractor's opinion the nature of the RFI requires a discussion, rather than simply an answer, the Contractor shall call the Owner s Representative to have such a discussion. The results of that discussion as well as all other RFI's must be presented in writing on a form approved in advanced by the Owner s Representative along with any supporting information or data, as well as the Contractor's recommended resolution. An oral RFI or a RFI presented on an unapproved form, or without adequate supporting information and Contractor's recommended solution, will be attributed solely to the contractor. The Owner s Representative s review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of the Contractor. 2. The Owner s Representative s review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology of the Contractor. 3. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit each RFI to a single issue. Information which is discernable from the contract documents; construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and construction site safety will not be addressed by the Owner s Representative in responding to a RFI. 4. The Owner s Representative s response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in construction cost or time. B. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. C. Frivolous or Unnecessary RFIs: Cost of design professional s time will be billed or deducted from progress payment. D. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Owner s Representative. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

19 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. E. Hard-Copy RFIs: Form at end of this Section. 1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number. F. The Owner s Representative Action: Owner s Representative will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 21 days for Owner s Representative response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Owner s Representative actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2. The Owner s Representative action may include a request for additional information, in which case Owner s Representative time for response will start again. 3. The Owner s Representative action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Owner s Representative in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Owner s Representative. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Owner s Representative response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request or may be scanned and submitted. 1. RFI Form. 2. RFI Log. END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

21 RFI FORM Project: RFI No: Project No: To: Date: From: Subject: Discipline: Category Specification Section Title: Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph: Sheet Number: Detail: Question: Suggestion: Attachment: Undersigned certifies: Both drawings and specification sections were thoroughly reviewed. Processing time for frivolous RFIs will be charged back to Contractors at A/E billable rates. Desired Response Date: (However, A/E still have specified days to respond.) Cost Impact: $ Schedule Impact: days Drawing Impact: Submitted by: Signed: Date: Answer: Answered by: Signed: Date: Copies: Owner Consultants File 1. A/E review of or responses to RFI's shall not constitute an approval, direction, or procedure related to the construction site safety precautions, procedures, or methodology of the Contractor. 2. The use of a RFI is limited to clarification of the contract documents. Contractor will limit each RFI to a single issue. Information that is discernable from the contract documents; construction means and methods; product substitution submittals; product submittals; and construction site safety will not be addressed by the A/E in responding to a RFI. 3. A/E response to a RFI is not a change order or directive authorizing an increase in construction cost or time. End of RFI Form PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION RFI FORM

22 RFI LOG Project: Contractor: Project Number: Updated Date: RFI Number Submit Date Subject of RFI Response Date Proposal Request No. Submitted by: Signed: Date: End of RFI Log PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION RFI LOG

23 SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Submittals Schedule. 3. Three Week Look-Ahead Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Owner s Representative final release or review. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit three opaque copies of schedule, large enough (minimum 11 x 17 ) to show entire schedule for entire construction period. C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at weekly intervals. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

24 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Concurrent with the development of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the submittal schedule with the Contractor's construction schedule described above. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule. 2. The Owner s Representative will review the schedule and indicate which submittals may be deleted from the submission requirement. The deletion of the submittal requirement for an item does not release the Contractor from any requirements of the Construction Contract, General Conditions or Plans and Specifications. B. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information: 1. Scheduled date for the first submittal. 2. Related Section number. 3. Submittal category. 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the part of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for resubmittal. 7. Scheduled date the Owner s Representative final release or review. C. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Owner s Representative, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

25 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, horizontal bar-chart type Contractor's construction schedule. Submit within 15 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work". The Construction Schedule must be submitted and accepted prior to approval of first pay application. 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as identified in the "Schedule of Values". 2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 4. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 5. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. 6. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Owner s Representative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. B. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phased completion to permit work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. C. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including testing and installation. D. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other activities. E. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, indicating "pre-calculated" and "actual" costs. On the line show dollar-volume of work performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. Refer to Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures. 2.3 THREE WEEK LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULE A. Prepare weekly (or as determined by scheduled meeting times), prior to Project meetings, a computer-generated 3-week look-ahead schedule (bar chart) which is consistent with the Contractors schedule and depicts daily labor activities. The schedule will consist of the prior week, current week and the following 3 weeks. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

26 2.4 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates changes, including, but not limited to, changes in durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of reviewed schedule to The Owner, Owner s Representative, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

27 3.2 FORMS A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request or may be scanned and submitted. 1. Submittals Schedule Form. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

28 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE FORM Preliminary Submittal Schedule: Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. Complete Submittal Schedule: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Project: From: To: Date: Scheduled Initial Submittal Date Spec Section No. Title Type: Action Info Only Name of Subcontractor Description Scheduled Date of Approval End of Submittal Schedule Form CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

29 SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Consult individual sections of specifications for specific submittals required under those sections and for further details and descriptions of requirements. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 4. Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports. 5. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 8. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 9. Other Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Owner s Representative responsive action. B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Owner s Representative responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

30 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Processing: All costs for printing, preparing, packaging, submitting, mailing, or delivering submittals for initial submittals and all costs for re-printing, re-drawing, re-drafting, re-packaging, re-submitting, and r ing or re-delivering as required for all re-submittals shall be included in Contract Sum. B. Sequence: Transmit each submittal in sequence which will not result in Owner s Representative approval having to be later modified or rescinded by reason of subsequent submittals which should have been processed earlier or concurrently for coordination. C. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Owner s Representative reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. D. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. E. Multiple Reviews: The Contractor shall also be responsible for all costs to Owner s Representative or Project consultants for reviews requiring more than 2 reviews for same specification section. F. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Owner s Representative receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Review: Allow 21 days for review of each submittal. The Owner s Representative will request for more time if needed. G. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Owner s Representative. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Owner s Representative. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Each submittal number shall be unique as follows: 1) Format shall be as follows: SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

31 a) Sequential Number - Revision Number - Project Specification Section Number (e.g., ). Do not use letters. 2) Submittal number shall be sequential starting with 1 (e.g., 1-#-#####). 3) First submittal for each section shall have number 1 as the revision number. (e.g., #-1-#####) 4) Resubmittal for same specification section shall have same first digit as the original submittal and sequential second digit revision number (e.g., #-2- ##### as in second submittal). 5) Sample submittal log would look like the following in the submittal number column: Note that is second submittal. Submittal Number (revised submittal: shown for clarity) i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification. H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Owner s Representative observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Owner s Representative. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. The Owner s Representative will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor. 1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Owner s Representative on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. K. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked Approved or Furnish as Noted. L. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

32 M. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating approval by Owner s Representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. a. Circle items applicable. b. Cross-out items not applicable. c. Select item number if required. 3. Submittal data must include complete documentation relating to all the specified features 4. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer s Submittal Form with all the options selected when available. b. Manufacturer's written recommendations. c. Manufacturer's product specifications. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions. e. Standard color charts. f. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. g. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. h. Printed performance curves. i. Operational range diagrams. j. Mill reports. k. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. l. Compliance with specified referenced standards. m. Testing by recognized testing agency. n. Application of testing agency labels and seals. o. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Number of Copies: Submit 4 copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. The Owner s Representative will return 2 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Do not use words "by others." Use words which depict exactly who is responsible for the work. c. Identification of products. d. Fabrication and installation drawings. e. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

33 f. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. g. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. h. Templates and patterns. i. Schedules. j. Design calculations. k. Compliance with specified standards. l. Notation of coordination requirements. m. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. n. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. o. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. p. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Number of Copies: Submit 4 sets of prints. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit 1 full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. The Owner s Representative will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

34 a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. The Owner s Representative will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. The Owner s Representative will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit 2 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. The Owner s Representative will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Owner s Representative, and other information specified. D. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

35 (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. H. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. I. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. K. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. L. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

36 of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Owner s Representative. 1. Coordinate the work; do not delegate responsibility for coordination to any subcontractor. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

37 2. Anticipate the interrelationship of all subcontractors and their relationship with the total work. 3. Resolve differences or disputes between subcontractors and materials suppliers concerning coordination, interference, or extent of work between sections. 4. Trade submittals with By Others, By General Contractor, or similar coordination and work scope are not allowed. Identify, acknowledge, and resolve scope of work prior to submittal by Contractor. No extras will be allowed. Provide complete and coordinated submittals. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.2 THE OWNER S REPRESENTATIVE S ACTION A. General: The Owner s Representative will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: The Owner s Representative will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. The Owner s Representative will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. C. Informational Submittals: The Owner s Representative will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. The Owner s Representative will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. F. The Owner s Representative s and Project Consultant s review shall neither be construed as complete check nor relieve the Contractor, Subcontractor, manufacturer, fabricator, or supplier from responsibility for any deficiency that may exist or from any departures or deviations from the requirements of the Contract unless the Contractor has, in writing, called the Owner s Representative attention to the deviations at the time of submission as specified. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

38 SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Owner s Representative, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Other Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Owner s Representative. C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or a QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

39 testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards. D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. G. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. H. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Owner s Representative for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Owner s Representative for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

40 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A licensed professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in California and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

41 assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." B. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Owner s Representative and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Owner s Representative and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. D. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

42 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. E. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. F. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Owner s Representative, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner s Representative. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Owner s Representative s reference during normal working hours. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

43 C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

44 SECTION REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes list of references. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Architect: Owner s Representative. C. AHJ : Agency having jurisdiction. D. "Approved": When used to convey Owner s Representative s action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Owner s Representative s duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Compatible : When used for products, it shall comply with requirements including products recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance. F. "Directed": A command or instruction by Owner s Representative. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." G. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." H. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. I. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. J. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. REFERENCES

45 K. Owner : As defined in Division 1 section Summary. L. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. M. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 2. Copies of standards and applicable building codes (Title 24 Parts 1-5) shall be kept on-site during construction. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations. E. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names. F. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names. G. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized names. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION REFERENCES

46 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Owner s Representative, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: 1. Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: 1. Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: 1. Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Sanitary Facilities: 1. Pay sanitary service use charge for temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

47 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. B. Wind Screen Fabric: Green. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES - Not Required. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. Minimum rated at Class 2A-10B:C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

48 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. 1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Install temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Electric Power Service: Install electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. F. Lighting: Install temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. B. Parking: Provide temporary or use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas if approved for construction personnel. C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

49 minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. E. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. G. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

50 C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

51 SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and product substitutions. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout. 3. Other Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Proposed products by manufacturers not listed in Manufacturers list. C. Basis-of-Design: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating or equal products of other named manufacturers. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

52 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Completed List: Submit 3 copies of completed product list within days specified in General Conditions. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 4. The Owner s Representative s Action: The Owner s Representative will respond in writing to Contractor within 21 days of receipt of completed product list. The Owner s Representative s response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. The Owner s Representative s response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit 4 copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use form provided at end of Section. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, environmental, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

53 i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. The Owner s Representative s Action: The Owner s Representative will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 21 days of receipt of request. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Owner s Representative cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Named Product and Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Owner s Representative will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

54 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed. 3. Refer to other sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Warranty Period: Warranty period specified in each sections are minimum requirements. Do not modify manufacturer s standard warranty period if the manufacturer s warranty has longer warranty period. D. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

55 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Owner s Representative will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Owner s Representative s. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or an equal product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with or equal. 6. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article to obtain approval by Owner s Representative for use of an unnamed product. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Owner s Representative s sample. The Owner s Representative s decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner s Representative will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include custom or premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Owner s Representative will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes standard, custom, and premium items. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

56 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Timing: Owner s Representative will consider requests for substitution if received within 35 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Owner s Representative. B. Conditions: The Owner s Representative will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Owner s Representative will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Owner s Representative for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction and has paid any fees. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 11. Furnish samples upon requested by Owner s Representative. 12. Attached Request for Substitution Form shall used for substitution requests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request or may be scanned and submitted. 1. Product List Form. 2. Similar Installation List Form. 3. Substitution Request Form. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

57 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Substitutions are only allowed within number of days specified. Use this form for requesting or equal products and materials. Project: Substitution Request Number: From: To: Date: Project Number: Specification Section Title: Section Number: Page: Article/Paragraph: Specified Item: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Contact Name: Address: Phone Number: Comparison between proposed substitution and specified product is attached. Note all differences. Reason for not using specified item: Specified product is no longer available. Substitution will improve lead time by days Substitution will save Owner $ Other: List 3 similar installations including project name, address, owner, and date installed is attached. Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explanation attached. Supporting Data Attached: Product Data (indicate any options to be included) Drawings Test Reports Samples Color Chart Other: Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable is available. Proposed substitution will not affect or delay Construction Progress Schedule. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including architectural or engineering design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

58 Substitutions for products or systems involving structural, fire/life safety and access compliance will require AHJ approval. This will add time required to review those substitutions requiring AHJ approval. Contractor is solely responsible for all documentation, cost, and time required to obtain AHJ approval. Submitted by: Signature: Firm: Date: Comments: A/E Review: Approve Substitution. Approve Substitution as Noted. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Reject Substitution. Use specified product. Substitution request received too late. Signed by: Date: Comments: Owner s Review and Action (Approval of substitution is not valid without Owner s signature) Substitution approved. Substitution approved as Noted. Substitution rejected. Use specified product. Signed by: Date: Comments: End of Substitution Request Form PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

59 PRODUCT LIST FORM Preliminary Product List. Complete Product List. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. Project: From: To: Date: Spec Section No. Title Early approval? Yes No Product Model No. Manufacturer Supplier Installer Delivery Date End of Product List Form PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PRODUCT LIST FORM

60 SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM Provide minimum 5 similar installations within last 3 years. Project: From: To: Date: 1 Date of Installation Project Name Owner Info GC Info Architect info End of Similar Installation List Form PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SIMILAR INSTALLATION LIST FORM

61 SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General installation of products. 2. Progress cleaning. 3. Starting and adjusting. 4. Protection of installed construction. 5. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

62 B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of underground gas, water-service piping; and electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine site for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Owner s Representative. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes and wiring as indicated. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

63 C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Owner s Representative. 2. Allow for material movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

64 specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.5 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Provide protection against weather, rain, wind, storms, frost and heat so as to maintain all work and materials free from injury or damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

65 3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

66 SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for environmental-protection measures during construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

67 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 3 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit three copies of report. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. D. Qualification Data: For Waste Management Coordinator. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT

68 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Extra Materials. 4. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 6. Other Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a copy of Title 24 Certificate of Acceptance forms submitted to enforcement agency. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

69 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner s Representative will either proceed with inspection process or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Owner s Representative will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner s Representative, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Owner s Representative. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection process for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner s Representative will either proceed with inspection process or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. The Owner s Representative will prepare a final Certificate for CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

70 Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use form attached. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Owner s Representative. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Owner s Representative for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date specified in General Conditions. B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Technical Specifications. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Include Table of Contents. 3. Identify content with specification section number and title. 4. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 5. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver to Owner s facility manager extra materials specified in each section. B. Organize submitted materials in orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Technical Specifications. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

71 1. Itemize each material and quantity in 8-1/2 by 11-inch paper. C. Label each items for easy identification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, and similar spaces. h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

72 j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. k. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. l. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. m. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. 3.2 FORMS A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request. 1. Punch-List Form. END OF SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

73 Preliminary Punch-List. Final Punch-List. PUNCH-LIST FORM Project: To: From: Date: Item No. Room No. Area Description Completion Date A/E Verification End of Punch-List Form PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PUNCH-LIST FORM

74 SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes systems and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Other Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Initial Submittal: Submit 2 draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. The Owner s Representative will return 1 copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B. Final Submittal: Submit 1 copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. The Owner s Representative will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

75 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Owner s Representative s comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Owner s Representative s comments. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

76 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Owner s Representative. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Technical Specifications. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Technical Specifications. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

77 B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Power failure. 5. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 6. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

78 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Technical Specifications. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

79 and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Technical Specifications. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

80 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

81 SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Other Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit 1 copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit 1 copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

82 individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Owner s Representative s written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Owner s Representative. e. Name of Contractor. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

83 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. 4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 4. Assemble in single binder with table of contents. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Owner s Representative s reference during normal working hours. 3.2 FORMS A. Electronic versions of attached forms will be provided upon request or may be scanned and submitted. 1. Record Product Data Form. END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

84 RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM Record Product Data is due no later than 10 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion. Photocopy for continuation sheets. List products in order by specification section numbers. Project Name: From: To: Date: Spec Section Originally Specified Actually Installed No. Title Model Manufacturer Model Manufacturer End of Record Product Data Form PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS RECORD PRODUCT DATA FORM

85 SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. 2. Other Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit 2 copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. At completion of training, submit 1 complete training manual(s) for Owner's use. B. Qualification Data: For instructor. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

86 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Owner s Representative. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner, with at least 7 days' advance notice. D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a written performance-based test. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

87 E. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

88 SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations. 2. Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" for disposal of demolished materials. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's and other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress, including for occupants affected by selective demolition operations. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. 6. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

89 B. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. E. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Notify Owner s Representative of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. B. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in construction to be selectively demolished and is scope of Work. C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

90 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Owner s Representative. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary." 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

91 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Owner s Representative, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. Patch and repair with similar materials. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Patch and repair with similar materials. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 1. Patch and repair with similar materials. D. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to roofing section for new roofing requirements. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

92 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management." B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

93 SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 3. Sliding glazing panel. 4. Fixed glazing panel. 5. Architectural elements. 6. Architectural surfacing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings and follow Section 1, Guidelines for Architectural Millwork Shop Drawing. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated requiring product selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge. 2. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square. 3. Corner pieces as follows: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

94 a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. a. Hardware samples will be returned up on approval. E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates for Product and Installation: WI-certified compliance certificates confirming conformance with Certified Compliance Program (CCP). G. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. Shop is a licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. B. Installer Qualifications: Licensee of WI's Certified Compliance Program. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Before delivery to job-site, Millwork supplier: a. Licensees of WI shall issue a certified compliance certificate indicating millwork products being furnished for this project, and certifying that these products and their installation, will fully meet requirements of grade or grades specified. b. Non-Licensees of WI shall provide evidence that they have arranged for inspection by WI inspector after completion of fabrication and installation. If conditions are found to be compliant, inspector will issue Compliance Certificate indicating millwork products being furnished for this project, and certifying that these products and their installation, will fully meet requirements of grade or grades specified. 2. Each elevation of casework and each countertop shall bear certified compliance label. 3. Cabinet Design Series (CDS): CDS numbers on Drawings indicate typical designs. D. Certified Seismic Installation Program (CSIP): 1. Before wood or metal stud walls are closed up provide a written Woodwork Institute Certified Seismic Installation Program (CSIP) report confirming that acceptable backing is provided in all locations required for casework installation or identifying those locations where backing is missing or improperly located.a. Backing shall consist of a minimum of either 3 x 6 Flat Douglas Fir or 16GA., 50 KSI sheet metal. 2. On completion of installation provide a Woodwork Institute Certified Seismic Installation Program Certificate, identifying the work covered and certifying that installation meets the requirements of the WI CSIP attachment details and schedules. 3. All fees charged by the Woodwork Institute for their Certified Seismic Installation Program are the responsibility of the millwork installer and shall be included in their bid. E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

95 testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

96 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of interior architectural woodwork that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 1. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. Formica Corporation. 3. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. 4. Arpa. 5. Abet Laminati. 6. Or equal. B. Solid Surfacing Materials: 1. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. Corian by E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. 3. Formica Corporation. 4. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. 5. Or equal. C. Medium-Density Fiberboard: 1. Medex, Medex NC, Medite II, or Arreis SDF by SierraPine Ltd. 2. Weyerhaeuser Company; Premier Plus by Weyerhaeuser. 3. Or equal. D. Particleboard: 1. Rodman Industries, Inc. 2. Acadia Board Company. 3. PrimeBoard, Inc. 4. Or equal. E. Cabinet hardware: 1. Knape & Vogt. 2. Blum. 3. Builders Brass Works. 4. Accuride. 5. Hafele. 6. Rockfokrd Process Control, Inc. 7. Or equal. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

97 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of WI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Core and Substrates: Comply with the following: 1. Backs of cabinets, book cases, etc. a. Hardboard: AHA A Plastic-laminates: a. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges. D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. E. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Products: As indicted on Drawings. 1. Adjustable Shelf Pilaster Standards: Side-mounted system using multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments. 2. Shelf Support Pins. 3. Grommets: Plastic, 2 inch diameter, locations as indicated. If locations are not indicated, as selected by Architect during shop drawing review. 4. Drawer and Door Pulls: For all, including accessible casework. 5. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish to key with door hardware. All doors and drawers to be lockable. 6. Hinges: Concealed (fully mortised) self-closing type, BHMA No. 652, steel with polished finish. 7. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B Counter Support Brackets. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

98 walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/l. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/l. E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. D. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. E. Drawer bottoms to be fully let-in, glued and blocked. Joinery must be lapped and mitered, no butt joints. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless. B. WI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

99 C. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS, inches (1.2 mm) thick. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS, inches (1.2 mm) thick. 4. Edges: Self-edge banded. E. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Any of one of following. 1. Low pressure decorative polyester overlay. 2. Low pressure decorative melamine overlay. 3. HPL cabinet liner. 4. Solid Phenolic core (SPC). 5. Vinyl at cabinet backs and drawer bottoms only. F. Concealed Surfaces: Any of one of following. 1. Solid Wood or Plywood: Any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility. Hardwood and softwood lumber kiln dried to 7 and 10 percent moisture content, respectively. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A Solid Phenolic core (SPC). G. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated on Drawings. 2.7 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch. B. Edge: 1-1/2 inch thick eased edge. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solidsurfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated on Drawings. D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 2.8 SLIDING GLAZING PANEL A. Sliding Door Assembly: Hydroslide Shower Door Hanger Kit by C.R. Laurence. (Basis of Design) B. Glazing: Laminated glass per Division 8 Section Glazing. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

100 2.9 FIXED GLAZING PANEL A. Post: Plaza Series, Custom, by C.R Laurence. (Basis of Design) B. Glazing: Laminated glass per Division 8 Section Glazing ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS A. Architectural Elements: MicroLite! by KMDI, Inc. (Basis of Design) 1. Description: Lightweight, seamless, fully encapsulated, composite material. 2. Use: Create interior, shop-fabricated, shop-finished, non-structural, architectural elements. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E 84: Class A ARCHITECTURAL SURFACING. A. Products: Reatec and LG. (Basis of Design). 1. Color: As indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

101 F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." H. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide Woodwork Institute Certified Seismic Installation Program (CSIP) inspection reports and certification as required in Part 1 of this Section. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

102 SECTION BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concealed thermal and sound insulation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. BUILDING INSULATION

103 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of building insulation that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass-Fiber Batt/Blanket Thermal and Sound Insulation: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Johns Manville (JM). (Basis of Design) 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 4. EcoBatt with ECOSE technology by Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning. 6. Lamtec. 7. Or equal. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BATT/BLANKET INSULATION A. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Batt/Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Glass-fiber bonded with acrylic thermosetting binder. 1. For walls and partitions: Unfaced Batts. 2. Formaldehyde-free, Unfaced Batts by JM or equal. B. Faced, Glass-Fiber Batt/Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on 1 face. 1. For ceilings under decks: FSK-25 Faced Batts with 2 inch tabs or Panel Deck FSK-25 Faced Batts with 5 inch tabs. 2. Formaldehyde-free, FSK-25 Faced Batts by JM or equal. BUILDING INSULATION

104 C. Thermal Rating: R values as indicated on Drawings. D. Sound Attenuation Ratings: Minimum R-11 on interior walls and partitions, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide. B. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated, or galvanized; type and size to suit application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. BUILDING INSULATION

105 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Install insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION BUILDING INSULATION

106 SECTION JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer. D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. JOINT SEALANTS

107 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution: 1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years. B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. C. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years. JOINT SEALANTS

108 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Joint Sealants: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Sika Corporation 2. Pecora Corporation. 3. Bostik. 4. Dow Corning Corp. 5. GE Plastics. 6. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc. 7. Tremco, Inc. 8. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 9. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/l. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/l. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/l. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: 1. As selected by Owner s Representative from manufacturer's full range. 2. Areas where concrete joint sealant will be adjacent to concrete other than standard gray, sealant color shall match adjacent color as approved by Owner s Representative. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. JOINT SEALANTS

109 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. JOINT SEALANTS

110 C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. JOINT SEALANTS

111 J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT LOCATION A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component. 1. Products: a. SikaFlex 1A or 15LM by Sika Corp. b. Dynatrol I-XL by Pecora. c. Stampede 1 by The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry. b. Joints between concrete and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and other materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. B. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Silicone, Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 1. Products: a. SikaSil WS-295 Silicone by Sika Corp. b. 895 Silicone or Sil-Span by Pecora. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps. C. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Products: JOINT SEALANTS

112 a. AC-20 manufactured by Pecora. b. 950A manufactured by The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Applications: a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints. b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. D. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, chemically-curing, cold-applied, self-leveling elastomeric sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; two-part. 1. Products: a. SikaFlex 2C SL or NS with TG Additive by Sika Corp. b. NR-200 self-leveling polyurethane and/or DYNATRED non-sag, traffic-grade polyurethane sealants by Pecora. c. Stampede 2SL by The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Primer: SikaFlex 429 Primer; P-150, P-75 or P Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 4. Applications: Use for joints up to 1-1/2 inches. a. Expansion joints in floors. E. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, chemically-curing, cold-applied, self-leveling elastomeric sealant; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; two-part. 1. Products: a. NR-200 Urexpan and/or DYNATRED non-sag, traffic-grade polyurethane sealant by Pecora or equal. b. Stampede 2NS by The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Primer: SikaFlex 429 Primer; P-150, P-75 or P Color: Gray or Limestone. 4. Applications: a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging. 1. Products: a. BC-158 sealant by Pecora. b. WL Silicone Rubber by The Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30. G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Products: a. SikaSil WS 290 or WS 295 by Sika Corp. b. 864 LM Architectural silicone or 890 silicone sealant by Pecora. c. 790 by Dow Corning Corporation. d. WL Silicone Ultra WL Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Applications: JOINT SEALANTS

113 a. Interior or exterior for joints 1/8 to 1-1/2 inch wide. b. Exterior use at expansion joints in masonry where substantial movement is expected. c. Glazing application. END OF SECTION JOINT SEALANTS

114 SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section Flush Wood Doors for wood door with steel frames. 2. Division 8 Section Door Hardware for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 9 Section Painting for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes. B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference designation for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame. c. Indicate steel sheet type (galvanized, non-galvanized, etc.) d. Indicate door and frame type (A, A1, B, C, etc.) e. Indicated hardware group. f. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. g. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

115 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with CBC Opening Protection Ratings and Markings and NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL-10C. 1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where required, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure per CBC Section B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with CBC Opening Protection Ratings and Marking sand NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to CBC Section Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing. Label each individual glazed lite. C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with CBC Section Glazing in Exit Enclosure and Exit Passageway Doors. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

116 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of steel doors and frames that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. (Basis of Design). 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications for interior doors and frames. C. Galvannealed (Metallic-Coated) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60 metallic coating for exterior doors and frames. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated. G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

117 H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection indicated. b. Standard Core: Honeycomb, U-factor of 0.69, R-value of Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius. 5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 7. Vision, Narrow Lite, Half Glass Doors: Size as indicated on Drawings. B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from galvannealed (metallic-coated) steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush): a. Face thickness: 16 gage (0.053 inch). 1) Product: Series L16 by Steelcraft. C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless galvanized (metalliccoated) sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush): a. Face thickness: 18 gage (0.042 inch). 1) Product: Series L18 by Steelcraft. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frame: 16 gage (0.053-inch) thick steel sheet. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

118 a. Product: F16 Series by Steelcraft. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. Knocked down is not allowed. 3. Frame: 16 gage (0.053-inch) thick steel sheet. a. Product: F16 Series by Steelcraft. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel. B. Provide Screw-In Top Cap for exterior doors. C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than inch thick. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

119 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: 1. Standard doors and frames: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding. 3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high. b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metalstud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

120 a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. H. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test. 1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Maximum Rate: 0.1 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. B. Field-Applied Paint Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

121 B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to CBC 716 and NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

122 g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

123 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

124 SECTION ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes interior aluminum frames for: 1. Doors. 2. Windows. 3. Clerestory. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section Flush Wood Doors for wood doors with aluminum frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall-opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of accessories. 6. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 7. Details of conduits and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of seals, gaskets, and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For interior aluminum frames, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Framing Member: 12 inches long. 2. Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner, including full-size sections of extrusions with factory-applied color finish. E. Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing. F. Maintenance Data: For interior aluminum frames to include in maintenance manuals. ALUMINUM FRAMES

125 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver interior aluminum frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. Store interior aluminum frames under cover at Project site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wilson Partitions (Arcadia Inc. Family). (Basis of Design) a. Series 525 with 2 inch trim. 2. Western Integrated Materials, Inc. 3. Modulex, Inc; Division of Pacific National Group. 4. RACO Interior Products, Inc. 5. Or equal. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than inch thick. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated. D. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum. E. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than inch thick, with removable snap-in casing trim, glazing stops and door stops without exposed fasteners. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals. ALUMINUM FRAMES

126 C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated. D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." E. Hardware: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section Door Hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections. B. Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as required by fire-rated label for assembly. C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame. 1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors. D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. 2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating mm or thicker) complying with AAMA Color: Black as approved by Architect. ALUMINUM FRAMES

127 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates. C. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 72 inches long must be one piece. 1. Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections. 2. Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members. 3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM FRAMES

128 SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-core doors of: 1. Plastic laminate doors. 2. Wood veneer doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" steel door frames. 2. Division 8 Section Aluminum Frames for interior aluminum frames. 3. Division 8 Section Door Hardware for door hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications. B. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of flush wood door work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame. c. Indicated hardware group. d. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. e. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. f. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. g. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1. Plastic-Laminate Door Faces: Show the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. 2. Faces of Factory-Finished Doors: Show the full range of colors available for stained finishes. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

129 D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. 2. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected and corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with NWWDA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." 1. Performance duty Level: Extra Heavy Duty. 2. Factory machined for door hardware and high density hardware blocking. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to CBC Section Oversize, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide oversize fire door label or certificate of inspection, from a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, stating that doors comply with requirements of design, materials, and construction. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: At exit enclosures, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450 deg F maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on top rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch top to bottom, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

130 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Marquis Series by Marshfield Door Systems. (Basis of Design) 2. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 3. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 4. VT Industries Inc. 5. Or equal. B. Flush Veneer Wood Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Signature Series by Marshfield Door Systems. (Basis of Design) 2. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 3. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 4. Maiman Company. 5. Marlite. 6. VT Industries Inc. 7. Haley Brothers, Inc. 8. Or equal. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde. B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). 2. Species and Cut: African Mahogany, quarter sliced. 3. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Book match. 4. Stiles: Same species as faces. C. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates (HPDL) complying with NEMA LD 3. a. Non-fire rated: Grade HGS. b. Fire rated: Grade SGF. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range of products. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

131 4. Stiles: Plastic-laminate matching faces, applied before faces. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Core: 1. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core: WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf. 2. Fire-Resistant Composite Core. B. Doors: 1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. C. Veneer-Faced Doors: 1. Construction: Five or seven plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. D. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. E. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screwholding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide manufacturer's standard laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance and with outer stile matching face veneer. 2.4 DOOR FRAMES A. Aluminum Frames: Comply with Division 8 Section Aluminum Frames. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with Division 8 Section Steel Door and Frames. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in sizes indicated for Project-site fitting. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115- W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

132 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. B. Finish doors at factory for transparent finish. C. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: NWWDA I.S.1-A System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Sheen: Semigloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. FLUSH WOOD DOORS

133 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION FLUSH WOOD DOORS

134 SECTION ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section Painting for field applied finishes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Size Variations: Obtain Owner s Representative s acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

135 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of access doors and frames that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 3 years. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Access Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor. 2. Milcor Inc. 3. Nystrom, Inc. 4. Karp Associates Inc. 5. MIFAB. 6. Or equal. 2.2 STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Factory Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Field Finish: Factory prime for field painting as specified in Division 9 Painting. D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

136 2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Recessed Door to Receive Drywall Type: 1. Fire-Rated: Model 450FR by Karp. 2. Non-Fire-Rated: Model RDW by Karp. a. Stainless steel in wet areas. b. 14 gage steel frame and shall be 16 gage steel doors in other areas. 3. Door shall be recessed 1 inch. 4. Trim shall be galvanized steel dry wall bead. 5. Hinge shall be concealed pivoting rod type. 6. Locks shall be flush and screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and studs, or shall be key operated cylinder lock with automatic dust shutter. 7. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey coat. 8. Door Sizes:As indicated on Drawings. 9. Field Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section Painting. B. Flange Type: 1. Fire-Rated: Model KRP-250 by Karp. 2. Non-Fire-Rated: Model DSC-214M by Karp. a. Stainless steel in wet areas. b. 14 gage steel frame and shall be 16 gage steel doors in other areas. 3. Flange: One-piece construction, 3/4 inch wide. 4. Hinge shall be concealed continuous piano hinge. 5. Locks shall be flush and screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and studs, or shall be key operated cylinder lock with automatic dust shutter. 6. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey coat. 7. Door Sizes:As indicated on Drawings. 8. Field Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section Painting. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame. D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

137 2.5 FINISHES A. Field finish per Division 9 Section Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

138 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.2 REFERENCES: 1. Door hardware, including electric hardware. 2. Power supplies for electric hardware. 3. Door position switches. A. Use date of standard in effect as of Bid date. 1. American National Standards Institute a) ANSI Materials and Finishes. 2. BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association California Building Code a) Chapter 11B Accessibility To Public Buildings, Public Accommodations, Commercial Buildings and Public Housing 4. DHI Door and Hardware Institute 5. NFPA National Fire Protection Association a) NFPA Edition Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. b) NFPA 105 Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies c) NFPA 252 Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 6. UL Underwriters Laboratories a) UL10C Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. b) UL 305 Panic Hardware 7. WHI Warnock Hersey Incorporated State of California Building Code 8. Local applicable codes 9. SDI Steel Door Institute 10. WI Woodwork Institute 11. AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 12. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers B. Abbreviations 1. Manufacturers: see table at 2.1.A of this section 2. Finishes: see 2.7 of this section. DOOR HARDWARE

139 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 1.3 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS A. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per D. Only submittals printed one sided will be accepted and reviewed. Organize vertically formatted schedule into Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Minimum 10pt font size. Include following information: 1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. 2. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A Name, part number and manufacturer of each item. 4. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5. Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule. 6. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7. Mounting locations for hardware. 8. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing. 9. List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number. 10. Catalog cuts. 11. Point-to-point wiring diagrams. 12. Manufacturer s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware. 13. Date of jobsite visit. B. Bid and submit manufacturer s updated/improved item if scheduled item is discontinued. C. Deviations: Highlight, encircle or otherwise identify deviations from Schedule of Finish Hardware on submittal with notations clearly designating those portions as deviating from this section. D. If discrepancy between drawings and scheduled material in this section, bid the more expensive of the two choices, note the discrepancy in the submittal and request direction from Architect for resolution. E. Substitutions per Division 1. Include product data and indicate benefit to the Project. Furnish operating samples on request. F. Items listed with no substitute manufacturers have been requested by Owner to meet existing standard. G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, riser and point-to-point wiring diagrams, manufacturers installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and supplier s final inspection report. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Qualifications: 1. Hardware supplier: direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified architectural hardware consultant (AHC), available at reasonable times during course of work for project hardware consultation to Owner, Architect and Contractor. DOOR HARDWARE

140 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA a) Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings. B. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one manufacturer. C. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. D. Fire-Rated Openings: NFPA 80 compliant. Hardware UL10C (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, and resilient seals. Coordinate with wood door section for required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete. E. Furnish hardware items required to complete the work in accordance with specified performance level and design intent, complying with manufacturers instructions and code requirements. F. Pre-Installation Meetings: Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and related trades, coordinate materials and techniques, and sequence complex hardware items and systems installation. Include manufacturers' representatives of locks, panic hardware and door closers in the meetings. Convene prior to commencement of related work. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Delivery: coordinate delivery to appropriate locations (shop or field). 1. Permanent keys and cores: secured delivery direct to Owner s representative. B. Acceptance at Site: Items individually packaged in manufacturers original containers, complete with proper fasteners and related pieces. Clearly mark packages to indicate contents, locations in hardware schedule and door numbers. C. Storage: Provide securely locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, dust, excessive heat and cold, etc. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect s approval. DOOR HARDWARE

141 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information: 1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete. 2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops. 3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware. 4. At masonry construction, coordinate with the anchoring and hollow metal supplier prior to frame installation by placing a strip of insulation, wood, or foam, on the back of the hollow metal frame behind the rabbet section for continuous hinges, as well as at rim panic hardware strike locations, silencers, coordinators, and door closer arm locations. When the frame is grouted in place, the backing will allow drilling and tapping without dulling or breaking the installer s bits. 5. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades. 6. Coordinate: low-voltage power supply locations. 7. Coordinate: back-up power for doors with automatic operators. 8. Coordinate: flush top rails of doors at outswinging exteriors, and throughout where adhesive-mounted seals occur. 9. Manufacturers templates to door and frame fabricators. C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation. D. Environmental considerations: segregate unused recyclable paper and paper product packaging, uninstalled metals, and plastics, and have these sent to a recycling center. E. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect existing conditions to verify finish hardware required to complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware scheduled for re-use, and sill condition material. If conflict between the specified/scheduled hardware and existing conditions, submit request for direction from Architect. Include date of jobsite visit in the submittal. 1.7 WARRANTY: 1. Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware expert will be rejected as non-compliant. A. Part of respective manufacturers regular terms of sale. Provide manufacturers written warranties. B. Include factory order numbers with close-out documents to validate warranty information, required for Owner in making future warranty claims: C. Minimum warranties: DOOR HARDWARE

142 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 1. Locksets: Three years 2. Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Lock: Seven Years 3. Exit Devices: Three years mechanical One year electrical 4. Closers: Thirty years mechanical Two years electrical 5. Hinges: One year 6. Other Hardware Two years 1.8 COMMISSIONING: A. Conduct these tests prior to request for certificate of substantial completion: 1. With installer present, test door hardware operation with climate control system and stairwell pressurization system both at rest and while in full operation. 2. With installer, access control contractor and electrical contractor present, test electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware systems for satisfactory operation. 3. With installer and electrical contractor present, test hardware interfaced with fire/life-safety system for proper operation and release. DOOR HARDWARE

143 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 1.9 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Listed acceptable alternate manufacturers: these will be considered; submit for review products with equivalent function and features of scheduled products. ITEM: MANUFACTURER: ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATE: Hinges (IVE) Ives Bommer Key System (C-R) Corbin Russwin Owner standard Mechanical Locks (C-R) Corbin Russwin Owner standard Electronic Locks (C-R) Corbin Russwin Owner standard Closers (LCN) LCN Owner standard Silencers (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco Push & Pull Plates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco Kickplates (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco Stops & Holders (IVE) Ives Rockwood, Trimco Overhead Stops (GLY) Glynn-Johnson ABH Thresholds (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese Seals & Bottoms (ZER) Zero NGP, Reese 2.2 HINGING METHODS: A. Drawings typically depict doors at 90 degrees. Doors will actually swing to maximum allowable. Use wide-throw conventional or continuous hinges as needed up to 8 inches in width to allow door to stand parallel to wall for true 180- degree opening. Advise architect if 8-inch width is insufficient. B. Conform to manufacturer s published hinge selection standard for door dimensions, weight and frequency, and to hinge selection as scheduled. Where manufacturer s standard exceeds the scheduled product, furnish the heavier of the two choices, notify Architect of deviation from scheduled hardware. C. Conventional Hinges: Steel or stainless steel pins and approved bearings. Hinge open widths minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door swing. DOOR HARDWARE

144 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 1. Outswinging exterior doors: non-ferrous with non-removable (NRP) pins and security studs. 2. Non-ferrous material exteriors and at doors subject to corrosive atmospheric conditions. D. Continuous Hinges: 1. Geared-type aluminum. a) Use wide-throw units where needed for maximum degree of swing, advise architect if commonly available hinges are insufficient. b) If units are used at storefront openings, color-coordinate hinge finish with storefront color. Custom anodizing and custom powdercoat finishes subject to Architect approval. 2. Pinned steel/stainless steel type: continuous stainless steel, 0.25-inch diameter stainless-steel hinge pin. a) Use engineered application-specific wide-throw units as needed to provide maximum swing degree of swing, advise architect if required width exceeds 8 inches. E. Pivots: high-strength forged bronze or stainless steel, tilt-on precision bearing and bearing pin. 1. Bottom and intermediate pivots: adjustability of minus inch, plus inch. F. Floor Closers: hydraulically controlled, cement case, maximum degree dead stop permitted by trim or adjacent structure. Special pins, floor pans and longer spindles when needed to accommodate floor and jamb conditions. 2.3 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS: A. Mortise Locksets and Latchsets: as scheduled. B. Surface Closers: [1461] 1. Full rack-and-pinion type cylinder with removable non-ferrous cover and cast iron body. Double heat-treated pinion shaft, single piece forged piston, chrome-silicon steel spring. 1. ISO 2000 certified. Units stamped with date-of-manufacture code. 2. Independent lab-tested 5,000,000 cycles. 3. Non-sized, non-handed and adjustable. Place closers inside building, stairs and rooms. 4. Plates, brackets and special templating when needed for interface with particular header, door and wall conditions and neighboring hardware. DOOR HARDWARE

145 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 5. Adjust doors to open with not more than 5.0-pounds pressure to open at exterior doors and 5.0-pounds at interior doors. As allowed per 2013 California Building Code Section 11B , local authority may increase the allowable pressure for fire doors to achieve positive latching, but not to exceed 15-pounds. a) Exception: exterior doors pressure-to-open may be increased to 8.5-pounds if: at a single location, and one of a bank of eight leafs or fraction of eight, and one leaf of this bank is fitted with a low- or high-energy operator. 6. Separate adjusting valves for closing speed, latching speed and backcheck, fourth valve for delayed action where scheduled. 7. Extra-duty arms (EDA) at exterior doors scheduled with parallel arm units. 8. Exterior door closers: tested to 100 hours of ASTM B117 salt spray test, furnish data on request. 9. Exterior doors: seasonal adjustments not required for temperatures from 120 degrees F to 0 degrees F, furnish checking fluid data on request. 10. Non-flaming fluid, will not fuel door or floor covering fires. 11. Pressure Relief Valves (PRV) not permitted. 2.7 OTHER HARDWARE A. Automatic Flush Bolts: Low operating force design. B. Overhead Stops: Non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Fieldchangeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions. C. Kick Plates: Four beveled edges,.050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. D. Door Stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware. 1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners. Where floor type cannot be used, provide wall type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type. 2. Locate overhead stops for maximum possible opening. Consult with Owner for furniture locations. Minimum: 90deg stop / 95deg deadstop. Note degree of opening in submittal. E. Sound-reducing adjustable seals: coordinate lockset backsets, rim exit device strikes, and parallel arm closers. Fabricate 7ga Z -brackets as bridging pieces to facilitate installation. Brackets: mild carbon steel, or stainless steel. F. Automatic door bottoms: low operating force units. Doors with automatic door bottoms plus head and jamb seals cannot require more than two pounds operating force to open when closer is disconnected. 1. Include automatic type door bottoms, as opposed to fixed sweeps, at stairs and elevator lobbies to allow fine-tuning of pressurization systems. DOOR HARDWARE

146 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA G. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details. Comply with CBC B Substitute products: certify that the products equal or exceed specified material s thickness. Proposed substitutions: submit for approval. 2. Saddle thresholds: inches minimum thickness. 3. Exteriors: Seal perimeter to exclude water and vermin. Use sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 "Thermal and Moisture Protection". Minimum 0.25 inch diameter fasteners and lead expansion shield anchors, or Red-Head #SFS-1420 (or approved equivalent) Flat Head Sleeve Anchors. National Guard Products COMBO or Pemko Manufacturing s FHSL. 4. Fire-rated openings, 90-minutes or less duration: use thresholds to interrupt floor covering material under the door where that material has a critical radiant flux value less than 0.22 watts per square centimeter, per NFPA 253. Use threshold unit as scheduled. If none scheduled, include a 0.25in high 5in wide saddle in the bid, and request direction from Architect. 5. Fire-rated openings, 3-hour duration: Thresholds, where scheduled, to extend full jamb depth. 6. Acoustic openings: Set units in full bed of Division-7-compliant, leave no air space between threshold and substrate. 7. Plastic plugs with wood or sheet metal screws are not an acceptable substitute for specified fastening methods. 8. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Pinned TORX drive at high security areas. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression. H. Through-bolts: Do not use. Coordinate with wood doors; ensure provision of proper blocking to support wood screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers. Coordinate with metal doors and frames; ensure provision of proper reinforcement to support machine screws for mounting panic hardware and door closers. 1. Exception: surface-mounted overhead stops, holders, and friction stays. I. Silencers: Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Leave no unfilled/uncovered pre-punched silencer holes. Intent: door bears against silencers, seals make minimal contact with minimal compression only enough to effect a seal. 2.8 FINISH: A. Generally: BHMA 625 Bright Chromium and BHMA 629 Bright Stainless Steel 1. Areas using BHMA 625: furnish push-plates, pulls and protection plates of BHMA 629, Satin Stainless Steel, unless otherwise scheduled. B. Door closers: factory powder coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted. DOOR HARDWARE

147 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 2.9 KEYING REQUIREMENTS: A. Key System: existing (Corbin-Russwin) system. Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner to determine system structure, furnish Owner s written approval of the system; do not order keys or cylinders without written confirmation of actual requirements from the Owner. Furnish temporary construction-keyed and permanent cylinders. Contractor to demonstrate to the Owner that temporary keys no longer operate the locking cylinders at the end of the project. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS: A. Can read and understand manufacturers templates, suppliers hardware schedule and printed installation instructions. Can readily distinguish drywall screws from manufacturers furnished fasteners. Available to meet with manufacturers representatives and related trades to discuss installation of hardware. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation. Make corrections before commencing hardware installation. Installation denotes acceptance of wall/frame condition. A. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security codes. 1. Notify Architect of code conflicts before ordering material. 1. Locate latching hardware between 34 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor, per California Building Code, Section and 11B Locate panic hardware between 36 inches to 44 inches above the finished floor. 3. Where new hardware is to be installed near existing doors/hardware scheduled to remain, match locations of existing hardware. B. Overhead stops: before installing, determine proposed locations of furniture items, fixtures, and other items to be protected by the overhead stop's action. C. Existing frames and doors to be retrofitted with new hardware: 1. Field-verify conditions and dimensions prior to ordering hardware. Fill existing hardware cut outs not being reused by the new hardware. Remove existing hardware not being reused, return to Owner unless directed otherwise. 2. Remove existing floor closers not scheduled for reuse, fill cavities with non-shrinking concrete and finish smooth. DOOR HARDWARE

148 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 3. Cut and weld existing steel frames currently prepared with 2.25 inch height strikes. Cut an approximate 8 inch section from the strike jamb and weld in a reinforced section to accommodate specified hardware s strike. 4. When modify existing fire rated opening provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintenance fire rating. 5. Recertify modified fire rated existing door & frame by a certified testing laboratory UL or Intertek. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware per manufacturer s instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper installation and operation. Remove and reinstall or replace work deemed defective by Architect. 1. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc; fasten hardware over and through these seals. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps. 2. When hardware is to be attached to existing metal surface and insufficient reinforcement exists, use RivNuts, NutSerts or similar anchoring device for screws. 3. Use manufacturers' fasteners furnished with hardware items, or submit Request for Substitution with Architect. 4. Replace fasteners damaged by power-driven tools. B. Locate floor stops no more than 4 inches from walls and not within paths of travel. See paragraph 2.2 regarding hinge widths, door should be well clear of point of wall reveal. Point of door contact no closer to the hinge edge than half the door width. Where situation is questionable or difficult, contact Architect for direction. C. Core concrete for exterior door stop anchors. Set anchors in approved non-shrink grout. D. Locate overhead stops for minimum 90 degrees at rest and for maximum allowable degree of swing. E. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames. F. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse. G. Field-verify existing conditions and measurements prior to ordering hardware. Fill verify existing hardware cut outs not being used by the new hardware. H. Remove existing hardware not being reused. Tag and bag removed hardware, turn over to Owner. I. Where existing wall conditions will not allow door to swing using the scheduled hinges, provide wide-throw hinges and if needed, extended arms on closers. DOOR HARDWARE

149 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA J. Provide manufacturer s recommended brackets to accommodate the mounting of closers on doors with flush transoms ADJUSTING A. Adjust and check for proper operation and function. Replace units, which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 1. Hardware damaged by improper installation or adjustment methods: repair or replace to Owner s satisfaction. 2. Adjust doors to fully latch with no more than 1 pound of pressure. a) Door closer valves: turn valves clockwise until at bottom do not force. Turn valves back out one and one-half turns and begin adjustment process from that point. Do not force valves beyond three full turns counterclockwise. 3. Adjust delayed-action closers on fire-rated doors to fully close from fullyopened position in no more than 10 seconds. 4. Adjust door closers per 1.9 this section. B. Inspection of fire door assemblies and means-of-egress panic-hardware doors: Per 2013 NFPA : hire an independent third-party inspection service to prepare a report listing these doors, and include a statement that there are zero deficiencies with the fire-rated assemblies and the openings with panic hardware. C. Fire-rated doors: 1. Wood doors: adjust to inches clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles. 2. Steel doors: adjust to inches minimum to inches maximum clearance at heads, jambs, and meeting stiles. 3. Adjust wood and steel doors to 0.75 inches maximum clearance (undercut) above threshold or finish floor material under door. D. Final inspection: Installer to provide letter to Owner that upon completion installer has visited the Project and has accomplished the following: 3.5 DEMONSTRATION: 1. Has re-adjusted hardware. 2. Has evaluated maintenance procedures and recommend changes or additions, and instructed Owner s personnel. 3. Has identified items that have deteriorated or failed. 4. Has submitted written report identifying problems. A. Demonstrate mechanical hardware and electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware systems, including adjustment and maintenance procedures. DOOR HARDWARE

150 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA 3.6 PROTECTION/CLEANING: A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc. Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. B. Clean adjacent wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation / reinstallation process. 3.7 SCHEDULE OF FINISH HARDWARE A. See door schedule in drawings for hardware set assignments. B. Do not order material until submittal has been reviewed, stamped, and signed by Architect s door hardware consultant. SpeXtra: Hardware Group No. 01 For use on door #(s): Each To Have: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish 1 EA LATCHSET ML2010 X LWA EA MAGNETIC LOCK M420P EA ACTIVATION SENSOR 1 EA DOOR CONTACT HM BLK 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS BB FA900 LGR EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND FINISH HARDWARE TO REMAIN AND REUSE - FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITION NEW MAGNETIC LOCK - BATTERY BACK UP MOTION ACTIVATION SENSOR CARD READER AND WIRING BY ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM Hardware Group No. 02 For use on pairs of door #(s): Each To Have: DOOR HARDWARE

151 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA Qty Description Catalog Number Finish 1 EA LATCHSET ML2010 X LWA EA MAGNETIC LOCK M422P EA ACTIVATION SENSOR 2 EA DOOR CONTACT HM BLK 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS BB FA900 LGR EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND FINISH HARDWARE TO REMAIN AND REUSE - FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITION MODIFY EXISTING DOOR AND FRAME FOR MAGNETIC LOCK CARD READER AND WIRING BY ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM NEW MAGNETIC LOCK - BATTERY BACK UP MOTION ACTIVATION SENSOR Hardware Group No. 03 For use on door #(s): Each To Have: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish 4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X EA OFFICE MORTISE ML2051 X LWA 629 LOCK 1 EA STOP 615 BLK WEATHER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME MANUFACTURER NEW CYLINDER TO MATCH EXISTING BUILDING STANDARD - CONSULT BUILDING LOCKSMITH Hardware Group No. 04 For use on door #(s): X-1 X-2 X-3 X-4 Each To Have: EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND FINISH HARDWARE TO REMAIN AND REUSE DOOR HARDWARE

152 AWT 9 TH FLOOR IMPROVEMENTS CITY OF ANAHEIM, CALL CENTER, CREDIT & BILLING DEPT.S, ANAHEIM,CA Hardware Group No. 05 For use on door #(s): 15 Each To Have: EXISTING DOOR, FRAME AND FINISH HARDWARE TO RELOCATE AND REUSE END OF SECTION DOOR HARDWARE

153 SECTION GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Clerestory Windows. 3. Glazing panels. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Samples: For each glazing products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass and of 12- inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 1. Insulating glass for each designation indicated. C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. 1. List by windows and door types scheduled on Drawings. D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. GLAZING

154 1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For installers. F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. G. Product Test Reports: For each types of glazing products specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain glazing products through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type as practical. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. F. Safety Glazing Products: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. GLAZING

155 G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: a. GANA's "Glazing Manual." b. GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years. B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years. C. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. GLAZING

156 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Glass Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. PPG. 2. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 3. Guardian. 4. Pilkington. 5. Visteon. 6. Or equal. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass (Safety Glass): ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality- Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other uncoated glass). 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heatstrengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. a. Class II tempered safety glazing per CBC and Table C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Silicone complying with ASTM C GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: GLAZING

157 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus Silicone complying with ASTM C D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 1. Silicone complying with ASTM C E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 1. Silicone complying with ASTM C F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 1. Silicone complying with ASTM C GLAZING

158 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. GLAZING

159 E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where indicated. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. GLAZING

160 B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. GLAZING

161 E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION GLAZING

162 SECTION NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Certification of Materials: For steel framing materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Construction Standards: Construction not on Drawings or referenced shall be as detailed in Technical Library by SSMA Technical Services. D. Deflection Limits: Maximum deflection of following at 5 psf. 1. Gypsum board assemblies: L/ Ceramic tile: L/ WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of non-load bearing steel framing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

163 a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers. 1. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO). 2. Clark Steel Framing Systems. 3. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 4. Dale/Incor. 5. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 6. Unimast, Inc. 7. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 8. Or equal. 2.2 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gage minimum. B. Wire Hangers: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than inch (12 gage) diameter. C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of inch (16 gage) and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-1/2 inch. D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than thick (20 gage). NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

164 E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Leg Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than thick (20 gage). 2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645; of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings B. Slip-Type Head Joints: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) VertiTrack VTD by Steel Network Inc. 2) Superior Flex Track System (SFT) by Superior Metal Trim. 3) Sliptrack by Dietrich Industries. 4) Or equal. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than inch (25 gage). D. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: inch (16 gage) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than thick (20 gage). F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Leg Configuration: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than thick (20 gage). G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: inch bare-steel thickness (16 gage), with minimum 1/2- inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel thickness of inch (20 gage). NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

165 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. a. Products: Hilti or equal as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

166 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

167 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

168 SECTION GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 2. Division 9 Section Painting for primers and finishes applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Finishes: Level 4 and 5 of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 4 by 4 foot sample. a. Finishes: For each finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following: a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each finish indicated. c. Each areas such as walls, ceilings, and soffits. GYPSUM BOARD

169 2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups. 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gypsum board that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Interior Gypsum Board: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. USG Corporation. 2. National Gypsum Company. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Or equal. GYPSUM BOARD

170 B. Steel Trim Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. USG Corporation. 2. Amico. 3. Or equal. 2.2 PANELS, GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. B. Type X: 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Trim: ASTM C Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges. B. Aluminum Trim and Reveal: As specified in Division 9 Section Portland Cement Plaster. 2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Sealants shall comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule GYPSUM BOARD

171 2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant: Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant by USG or equal. 1. Sealants shall comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule D. Thermal and Acoustical Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." E. Gypsum Board Adhesives: 1. High performance latex-based construction adhesive designed for gypsum board applications. 2. Adhesives shall comply with South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule Products: a. Green Series SW-325 Shear & Drywall Adhesive by OSI. b. Drywall Adhesive GDWA by Grabberman. c. Or equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered GYPSUM BOARD

172 edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Owner s Representative for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings. D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings. 3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Comply with GA 214 for Level definitions. 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. GYPSUM BOARD

173 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for ceramic tile or acoustical tile. 3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings. 4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view with flat paint finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 5. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view with non-flat paint finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD

174 SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels for existing suspension systems for ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AC: Articulation Class. B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling. D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components and anchor and fastener type. E. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAPaccredited laboratory, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated. NVLAP-accredited laboratories must document accreditation, based on a "Certificate of Accreditation" and a "Scope of Accreditation" listing the test methods specified. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

175 B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surfaceburning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. b. Flame-Spread Classification: CBC 803 and Table ) Flame-Spread Rating: Class 1 (0-25). D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of acoustical panel ceilings that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

176 2. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acoustical Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. Hunter Douglas Architectural Products. 4. BPB- Celotex/CertainTeed. 5. Tectum Inc. 6. Or equal. B. Suspension Systems: Existing. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Product: Ultima High NRC by Armstrong World Industries or equal. 1. Surface Texture: Fine. 2. Composition: Mineral Fiber. 3. Color: White. 4. Size: Model 1942, 24 by 24 inch by 7/8 inch Beveled Tegular 9/16 inch grid. 5. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton, ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

177 6. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton, Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL). 9. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; White Panel: Light Reflectance: Dimensional Stability: HumiGuard Plus - temperatures up to 120 degrees F and high humidity excluding only exterior use, use over standing water, and direct contact with moisture. 11. Mold/Mildew Inhibitor: The front and back of the product have been treated with BioBlock, a paint that contains a special biocide that inhibits or retards the growth of mold or mildew, ASTM D METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Use existing. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Comply with requirement of Division 7 Joint Sealants. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer s written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

178 touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

179 SECTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT). 2. Vinyl Flooring. 3. Resilient wall base and accessories. 4. Underlayments. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include concrete moisture and alkalinity limits. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. D. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre-Molded Corners: Pre-molded inside and outside rubber base corners shall be from same production run as straight base. These are commonly from different production run and as result are different color shades. This color difference often negates premium appearance of pre-molded products. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

180 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: hours before installation. 2. During installation hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of resilient floor tile that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 2. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

181 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Vinyl Floor Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Balon. (Basis of Design) 2. Or equal. B. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT): Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Johnsonite. (Basis of Design) 2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 3. Lightwood by TOLI International. 4. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 5. Roppe Corporation. 6. VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division. 7. Shaw Hard Surface. 8. Or equal. C. Type TP Resilient Wall Base: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Johnsonite. (Basis of Design) 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 3. Allstate Rubber. 4. Armstrong. 5. Or equal. D. Underlayments: 1. Tarkett. (Basis of Design) 2. Or equal. 2.2 VINYL FLOOR TILE A. Products: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 LUXURY VINYL TILE (LVT) A. Product: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Product: As indicated on Drawings. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

182 2.5 UNDERLAYMENTS A. Product: SureStart Underlayment by Tarkett or equal. 1. High-density synthetic rubber construction with superior acoustical sound reduction performance. 2. Physical Characteristics: a. Density: 62 lbs./ft3 or 42 oz./yd2. b. Thickness: c. R-Value: d. Permeability (ASTM E96): < 1 perm. e. Color: Green. f. Castor Durability Test: Passes 25,000 cycles. g. Roll Width/Length: 36 x Acoustical Data: a. ASTM E492 & E989: IIC 66. b. ASTM E2179: Delta IIC 17. c. ASTM E90 / 413: STC INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed resilient tile and as recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance or provided by resilient tile manufacturer for the type of carpet being installed. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/l. C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

183 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. See Tarkett SureStart installation instructions for complete details. 3.4 TILE INSTALLATION A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated. B. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

184 F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. END OF SECTION RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

185 SECTION TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes modular, carpet tile. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. 1. Include concrete moisture and alkalinity limits. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Existing flooring materials to remain. 4. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 5. Type of subfloor. 6. Type of installation. 7. Pattern of installation. 8. Pattern type, location, and direction. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. TILE CARPETING

186 E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. G. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mockups: Before installing carpet tile, build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of Substantial Completion. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. 2. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have ph range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. TILE CARPETING

187 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: Lifetime. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Masland Contract. (Basis of Design) 2. Bentley Prince Street. 3. Tandus. 4. Collins & Aikman. 5. Shaw 6. Interface 7. Mohawk. 8. Bolyu. 9. J+J Invision. 10. Patcraft. 11. Or equal. 2.2 CARPET TILE A. Low-Emitting Materials: Carpet tiles shall be Green Label certified. B. Product: As indicated on Drawings. TILE CARPETING

188 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and as recommended/ required by the manufacturer for warrantee acceptance or provided by carpet tile manufacturer for the type of carpet being installed. 1. VOC Limits: Provide adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when tested according to ASTM D 5116: a. Total VOCs: 50g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Substrates: 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. TILE CARPETING

189 D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION TILE CARPETING

190 SECTION PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Surface Preparation. 2. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data - Submit product data sheets for each product. B. Samples: 1. Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and systems selected with specified coats cascaded. 2. Submit on suitable backing, 8x10 inch size. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. C. Environment Requirements: 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be stored and applied. PAINTING

191 2. Do not paint when there is a threat of rain within 24 hours or when surface or air temperatures are at or below 40 degrees. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Installer Warranty: 1 year. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK A. Minimum 1 gallon each product in original or new 1 gallon cans. 1. Color spot each lid. 2. Identify with formula, location, product and date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Dunn-Edwards (Basis of Design) 2. Glidden (ICI) Paints. 3. Sherwin Williams. 4. Frazee Paint. 5. Vista Paint. 6. Or equal. 2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. B. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not proceed unless substrate is suitable. PAINTING

192 C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTMD Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTMD PREPARATION OF SURFACE A. General: 1. Clean all exterior walls and surfaces of loose and scaly paint, dirt, dust, chalk, and other foreign matter by water-blasting using care not to damage substrate followed by hand scraping, sanding or wire brushing after surfaces are dry. Mildew must be treated with household bleach solution and rinsed thoroughly. 2. Patch, caulk, set protruding nails and repair all surfaces and cracks where necessary with suitable patching materials and smooth off to match adjacent surfaces. 3. Sand Glossy surfaces to dull surface and remove residue. 4. Remove mildew from affected surfaces with a solution of Tri-Sodium Phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry completely. 5. Existing surfaces to be recoated shall be thoroughly cleaned and de-glossed by sanding or other means prior to priming and painting. Patched and bare areas shall be spot primed with the same primer as specified for new work. 6. Rusty metal: Scrape, sand or wire wheel, feathering edges to sound coating. Dust surfaces. Topcoat. 7. Remove soil and body oils completely from surfaces, including handrails, door edges and posts. Treat with Liquid Sandpaper or Dull-N-Bond. 8. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures and similar items not to be finished. Reinstall at completion. 9. Paint edges of sink cut-outs. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove all oils and contamination from galvanized surfaces scheduled to be painted by washing with a compliant solvent wash. C. Ferrous Metal: Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from ferrous metal surfaces. Primer coat shall be applied not less than 30 minutes, nor more than 3 hours after preparation of surface. D. Primed Metal: Sand and scrape shop primed metal to remove loose primer and rust. Touch-up bare, abraded and damaged areas with metal primer. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. E. Gypsum Board: Gypsum board shall be dusted clean and free from encrustations and other foreign matter. F. Preparation of other surfaces shall be performed following specific recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.3 PREVISOUSLY COATED SURFACES PAINTING

193 A. Maintenance painting will frequently not permit or require complete removal of all old coatings prior to repainting. However, all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers must be removed to assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old paint. Glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer. Recognize that any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coating may compromise the service length of the system. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required per ASTM D APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust particles just prior to applying next coat. F. Stipple all edges and corners to conceal brush marks. G. Paint entire trim element with like color. Painting of faces only is unacceptable. Trim surfaces must be wrapped with the trim color and not "faced off" or "Hollywooded". H. Doors: Paint entire door unless otherwise noted, including door top and bottom edge surfaces. I. Tinting: Tint each primer a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint primer to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of primer to distinguish each separate coat. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades and items not intended to receive paint. Install "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted surfaces. 3.6 CLEANING A. Protection - Carefully protect areas where work is in progress from damage. 1. Provide and spread clean drop cloths when and where required to provide the necessary protection. PAINTING

194 2. Immediately clean-up all accidental spatter, spillage, misplaced paint and restore the affected surface to its original condition. B. Clean-up: 1. Clean up debris daily per OSHA requirements. 2. At completion of work, remove all materials, supplies, debris and rubbish and leave each area in a clean, acceptable condition. 3. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 3.7 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED A. Paint all new work and areas affected by new work, unless noted otherwise. B. Do not paint or finish the following items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Paint shop primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels. 3.8 PAINT SYSTEMS EXTERIOR A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Alkyd Emulsion / 100% Acrylic: a. First Coat: BLOC-RUST Red Oxide or White (BRPR00-1-RO or BRPR00-1-WH b. Second Coat: SYN-LUSTRO, Rust Preventive 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (W- 9). SPARTASHIELD Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint (SSHL50). c. Third Coat: SYN-LUSTRO, Rust Preventive 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (W- 9). SPARTASHIELD Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint (SSHL50). B. Non-Ferrous (Galvanized) Metal: 1. Semi-Gloss Alkyd / 100% Acrylic: a. Pretreatment: SUPREME CHEMICAL, METAL CLEAN AND ETCH (ME 01). b. First Coat: GALV-ALUM Premium, Non Ferrous Metal Primer (GAPR00). ULTRA GRIP Premium (UGPR00) Interior Exterior Primer. c. Second Coat: SYN-LUSTRO, Rust Preventive 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (W- 9).SPARTASHIELD Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint (SSHL50) d. Third Coat: SYN-LUSTRO, Rust Preventive 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Paint (W- 9). SPARTASHIELD Exterior Semi-Gloss Paint (SSHL50) 3.9 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR - ZERO VOC PAINTING

195 A. Gypsum Board: 1. Flat, Modified Copolymer, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: VINYLASTIC Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (VNSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Flat Paint (SZRO10). 2. Eggshell, Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: VINYLASTIC Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (VNSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Eggshell Paint (SZRO30). 3. Semi-Gloss, 100%Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: First Coat: VINYLASTIC Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (VNSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint (SZRO50). 4. Flat, Modified Copolymer, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Flat Paint (SZRO10). 5. Eggshell, Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Eggshell Paint (SZRO30). 6. Semi-Gloss, 100%Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint (SZRO50). B. Metals: Ferrous 1. Flat, Modified Copolymer, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: BLOC-RUST Red Oxide or White (BRPR00-1-RO or BRPR00-1-WH). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Flat Paint (SZRO10). 2. Eggshell, Modified Copolymer, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: BLOC-RUST Red Oxide or White (BRPR00-1-RO or BRPR00-1-WH). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Eggshell Paint (SZRO30). 3. Semi-Gloss, Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: BLOC-RUST Red Oxide or White (BRPR00-1-RO or BRPR00-1-WH) b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint (SZRO50). C. Metals: Non-Ferrous. 1. Flat, Modified Copolymer, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Flat Paint (SZRO10). 2. Eggshell, Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Eggshell Paint (SZRO30). 3. Semi-Gloss, 100%Acrylic, Low-Odor/Zero-VOC: a. First Coat: ULTRAGRIP Select Low odor Zero VOC Sealer (UGSL00). b. Two Coats: SPARTAZERO Low-Odor/Zero-VOC Interior Semi-Gloss Paint (SZRO50). PAINTING

196 3.10 COLORS A. As indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION PAINTING

197 SECTION SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs (room signs). 2. Signage accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, artwork, and braille layout. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected: 1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required. 2. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project. E. Qualification Data: For Installer. F. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer. SIGNAGE

198 C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.6 COORDINATION A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs. 1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signage fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Signs: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Seton Signs (Basis of Design). 2. Best Sign Systems Inc. 3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 4. Curcio Enterprises, Inc. 5. Mohawk Sign Systems. 6. Sign A Rama. 7. Or equal. 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. SIGNAGE

199 1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. B. Signs: Seton Signs shown and detailed on Drawings. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface. B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs. C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. SIGNAGE

200 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Signs placed on glazed surfaces, backing sign of the same material and color shall be applied on the opposite glazed surface. 3. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door. B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: 1. Interior Signs on Smooth Substrates: a. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. 2. Exterior and Interior Signs on Rough Substrates: a. Mechanical Fasteners: Mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 1) Fastener: Stainless steel screws, tamper-resistant flat head countersink. 2) Anchors: Suitable for secure attachment to substrate. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION SIGNAGE

201 SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. Include Samples of hardware and accessories involving material and color selection. D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. TOILET COMPARTMENTS

202 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Compartments: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Imperial by Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company. 2. Century by Global Steel Products Corp. 3. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. 1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879, 01Z. 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed. B. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M. 2.3 STEEL UNITS A. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Provide with no-sightline system. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resinimpregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters. 2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. B. Urinal-Screen Construction: 1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel construction. 2. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full-height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick. 3. Wedge-Shaped, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panels, V-shaped, fabricated for concealed wall attachment, and maximum 6 inches wide at wall and minimum 1 inch wide at protruding end. TOILET COMPARTMENTS

203 C. Facing Sheets and Closures: Electrolytically coated or hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses as follows: 1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than inch. 2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than inch. 3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than inch. 4. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the panels. D. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; stainless steel. 2. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. F. Door Pull: U shape. G. Steel-Sheet Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-on finish, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 3. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistanttype heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Ceiling-Hung Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for connection to structural support above finished TOILET COMPARTMENTS

204 ceiling. Provide assemblies that support pilasters from structure without transmitting load to finished ceiling. Provide sleeves (caps) at tops of pilasters to conceal anchorage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Ceiling-Hung Units: Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so bottoms of doors are level with bottoms of pilasters when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: 1. Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. 2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. 3. Set hinges all accessible stalls to return to fully closed position. END OF SECTION TOILET COMPARTMENTS

205 SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Owner s Representative. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

206 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace toilet and bath accessories that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year. B. Installer s Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation. 4. Or equal. B. Underlavatory Guards: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. Handy-Shield by Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. IPS Corp. 3. TCI Products. 4. Truebro, Inc. 5. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

207 2.3 TOILET AND SHOWER ACCESSORIES A. As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Product: Handy-Shield Maxx by Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. or equal. 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. PVC insulator shall be 1/8" thick. 3. Meets Testing Standard ASTM E per IBC Chapter 8. a. 25 flame spread. b. 450 smoke index. 4. Surfaces to be soft, smooth, non-absorbent, easy to clean U/V inhibited, antimicrobial, antifungal properties. 5. Insulator shall have a dual fastening system which consists of fusion bonded Velcro fastener strips for full slit enclosure and tamper resistant, smooth, non-abrasive snaplocking fasteners. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

208 END OF SECTION TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

209 SECTION FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Portable fire extinguishers. 2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets. 1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For fire-protection cabinets with factory-applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required for fireprotection cabinets, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square. D. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, 2007 Edition, "Portable Fire Extinguishers." C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

210 D. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements of ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: 6 years. B. Installer Warranty: 1 year. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 1. JL Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design) 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. 4. Ansul. 5. Or equal. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. B. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick minimum. 2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

211 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B. 4. Certification Tag: Provide fire extinguisher with valid certification test tag where fire extinguishers are fully charged and ready to be used. B. Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class 2A-10B:C. 2. Nominal Capacity: Provide largest capacity fire extinguisher that will fit in the cabinet, but 5 lbs. minimum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color. 4. Use: General purpose. 2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET A. Product: ALTA by Potter Roemer. 1. Cabinet Size: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 2. Mounting: Semi-recessed. 3. Door and Frame Material: a. Steel: Cold rolled steel with electostatically applied thermally fused coating. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. 4. Door Style: Full break glass. 5. Glazing: 1/4 inch tempered glass. 6. Lettering: Vertical; red, white, or black as selected by Architect. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from inch- thick, coldrolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. a. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick. 2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

212 C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer s full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be installed. B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated on Drawings. B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. 2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

213 END OF SECTION FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

214 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. General Description: 1. Air conditioning for indicated area complete with supply ducts, return air ducts, air distribution equipment and controls. 2. Air conditioning units complete with required supply fans, cooling coils, filters, ductwork, diffusers, grilles, dampers, controls and other items herein specified. 3. Ventilation of miscellaneous rooms with exhaust fans, ducting and controls. 4. Removal of existing ductwork as indicated on the drawings. 1.2 RELATED WORK INCLUDED IN THIS SECTION A. Furnish electrical devices necessary for mechanical work, except disconnects unless indicated otherwise. B. Line and low voltage wiring for mechanical controls including final connections. C. Conduit for line and low voltage wiring for mechanical controls. D. Responsibility for obtaining clarification of discrepancies between mechanical and electrical work prior to proceeding with the work. E. Responsibility for proper operation of automatic electric controls and equipment and of electric power driven equipment furnished under this section. F. Miscellaneous steel for ducts and pipes hangers and supports including structural calculations prepared by a California licensed Structural Engineer. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS A. Electrical work as follows will be provided Electrical contract scope: 1. Conduit for line wiring for equipment and devices as indicated or specified except conduit for line and low voltage wiring for mechanical controls as specified under Division Line wiring for equipment and devices as indicated or specified herein except line and low voltage wiring for mechanical controls as specified under Division Providing disconnect switches. 4. Installing electrical devices such as starters and disconnects, and when indicated, furnishing all such devices. B. Building Management and Control System Temperature Controls. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

215 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: In addition to the requirements of all governing codes, ordinances and agencies, conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. Applicable City regulations and ordinances 2. California Building Code, 2016 Edition 3. California Mechanical Code, 2016 Edition 4. The California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, Health and Safety Code, State of California 6. National Board of Fire Underwriters Publications: a. Pamphlet # 70 National Electrical Code b. Pamphlet # 90A Air Conditioning Systems 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Before any of the materials of this Section are delivered at the jobsite, submit complete shop drawings. Show all details of all ductwork, piping and equipment pads. The shop drawings shall represent a coordinated set of drawings with other disciplines. B. Product Data: 1. Submit copies of all manufacturers product data simultaneously with all shop drawing submittals. 2. Product data to include all air conditioning equipment, hangers, fans, ductwork construction, piping, and other standard items as required to complement shop drawings for a submittal indicating all products to be used on this work. 3. Manufacturers and suppliers of equipment shall provide all data necessary for compliance with the State of California Energy Efficiency Code: Compliance certification for all equipment shall be included in equipment submittals. C. Record Drawings: Maintain throughout the progress of the work project record drawings and submit to the Architect at completion of work. D. Operating Manuals and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Submit copies of all operating instructions and maintenance manuals. 2. Fully instruct Owner operating personnel and demonstrate performance, operation and maintenance of equipment. Amount of time allocated for said instruction and demonstrations of equipment and systems shall be part of these obligations. Submit a letter to Architect signed by Owner representative who will operate system stating that he is fully instructed by contractor about operation and maintenance of equipment and system. 3. Submit one additional set of approved instructions and one additional set of approved 11 inch x 17 inch control diagrams suitably framed behind glass for mounting as directed. 1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Take all precautions necessary to protect the materials of this section before, during, and after installation. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately repair all damaged and defective work to the approval of the Architect at no additional cost to Owner. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

216 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Examination of the Site: Examine the site and include all conditions in bid proposal under which work is to be performed. 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS A. Locations and Accessibility: Contractor shall fully inform himself regarding peculiarities and limitations of spaces available for installation of work under this section. Valves, motors, controls and other devices requiring service, maintenance and adjustment shall be placed in fully accessible positions and locations. Provide access doors where required in ductwork or construction whether specially detailed or not, and render all such devices accessible. B. Drawings indicate desired location and arrangement of ductwork, piping, equipment and other items, and are to be followed as closely as possible. All offsets and interferences may not be indicated due to the scale of the Drawings. Contractor shall assume responsibility for coordinating work with all other trades. Work specified and not clearly defined by the drawings shall be installed and arranged in a manner satisfactory to Architect. In the event changes in indicated locations and arrangements are deemed necessary by Architect, they shall be made by Contractor without additional charges provided the change is ordered before work is installed and no extra materials are required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION A. All insulation shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24. B. Thermal Duct Insulation: Insulate all concealed cold supply air, return air and plenums unless otherwise specified, with Johns Manville Microlite fiberglass duct insulation, wrapped entirely around duct with joints lapped at least 2 inches and secured with 16 gauge galvanized wire on 12 inch centers. Insulation value shall comply with Title 24 requirements. Insulation shall cover all surfaces including standing seams. C. Mechanical fasteners shall be flush with the liner surface and shall start within 2 inches of the leading edge of each section and within 3 inches of the leading edge of all cross joints within the duct section. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be heavily coated with an approved fire resistant adhesive. The duct liner shall be cut to assure snug closing corner joints, the black surface of the liner shall face the air stream, transverse joints shall be neatly butted, and heavily coated with an approved fire resistant adhesive. D. Contractor s Option: Concealed main supply air ducts and plenums may be lined in lined in lieu of external wrapping as hereinbefore specified. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

217 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2.2 DUCTS AND SHEET METAL WORK Provide ducts, plenums, access doors, fresh air intakes and exhausts as indicated and required. All ductwork shall be constructed, erected and tested in accordance with the most restrictive of local regulations, procedures detailed in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals or the applicable standards adopted by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. Provide prefabricated spiral lockseam ducts and fittings and rectangular ducts of galvanized steel. Primary cold supply air shall be medium pressure, 4 inch S.P. Distribution ductwork downstream of VAV boxes shall be low pressure, 1 inch S.P. Outside air and exhaust air ductwork shall be low pressure, 2 inch S.P. A. Final connections to ceiling diffuser boxes and linear diffusers shall be made with flexible glass fiber duct. Casco Silent Flex-II. Connections of flexible duct to round ducts shall be made with ½ inch wide positive locking straps. B. All connections to main cold supply ducts shall be made with low loss fittings. C. Flat duct surfaces shall be crimped diagonally regardless of size. Longitudinal joints in all duct sizes may be flat-lock joints. Transverse joints and intermediate bracing shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal or galvanized structural angles in accordance with requirements of the ASHRAE guide and public authorities having jurisdiction. D. Lock joints shall be hammered to make them airtight. Inside of duct shall present a smooth surface to flow of air. E. Changes in size of ducts shall increase gradually with a slope of not more than 12 inches in 5 feet where possible, but not more than 12 inches in 3 feet in any event. F. Turns shall be made with a throat radius of not less than the duct width. G. Horizontal ductwork shall be strongly supported with galvanized hangers in accordance with the requirements of the ASHRAE guide and public authorities having jurisdiction. H. Provide double thickness turning vanes at all sharp right angle turns. I. Plenums shall be made of 18 gauge galvanized sheet steel reinforced horizontally on a maximum of 48 inch centers by 1-1/2 x 1-1/4 x 1/8 inch galvanized angles and reinforced vertically by 1-1/2 inch standing seams. J. Plenum access doors 24 x 54 inch minimum size shall be galvanized sheet steel doors and frames properly reinforced to prevent breathing. Door shall be of same gauge as the duct or casing and shall have 1 inch insulation with galvanized sheet steel on both sides. Each door shall be hung on 5% tee hinges with one or more catches which are operable from both sides and similar to Ventfabrics, Inc. 260 Ventlock Hatch. Doors shall be hung to open against pressure and shall be fitted with felt to ensure airtightness. K. Flexible connections for air ducts shall be 16 oz. airtight Ventglass noncombustible fabric with fire retardant neoprene coating on outside. Attach to ductwork by lock seam. Install not more than 6 inches long. Provide where required or indicated. L. Seal joints on main cold supply air ducts at each floor with UL classified sealant. Sealant shall be specifically designed to seal high pressure ductwork. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

218 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2.3 TURNING VANES A. Both dimensions less than 48 inches: Single vane or approved double thickness airfoil vanes. B. Either dimension greater than 48 inches: Double thickness airfoil vanes of approved pattern. C. Rectangular smooth radius elbows: Provide multiple splitter vanes. 2.4 DAMPERS A. Provide balancing volume dampers in each branch duct and in each main duct of constant volume systems to provide for complete air balancing. Fit each manual volume damper with bearings and an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Provide access panels if concealed or inaccessible through ceiling or wall. B. Balancing dampers where neither dimension of duct exceeds 17 inches may be a job fabricated butterfly type consisting of a blade constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel securely riveted or welded at its center axis to a square operating rod. C. Balancing dampers where either dimension exceeds 18 inches shall be Air Balance AC-116, opposed blade type. 2.5 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Air distribution equipment shall be of sizes and capacities indicated, furnished in factory finished enamel of color selected. Submit paint samples for approval. B. Square Ceiling Diffusers: Titus model PCS, steel construction with perforated face. Mounting shall be adapted to ceiling suspension system. Use modular face size 24 x 24 inches. 16 x 16 inch ceiling module shall be used for hard ceiling installation and in all restrooms. C. Return and Relief Air Grilles: Titus model PXP, steel construction to match ceiling diffusers. D. Provide branch balancing damper with remote damper operator by Pottorff or Young Regulator in inaccessible locations where no access panels are indicated on the drawings. 2.6 EQUALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. In addition to manufacturers specified, the following shall also be considered equal, providing corresponding models meet specified requirements. Equivalent substituted equipment named herein shall be submitted to Architect for approval. Submit alternate selections at time of bid listing major equipment. Item: Manufacturer: 1. Vibration Isolation: Mason Industries 2. Insulation: Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Knauf 3. Dampers: Pottorff, Greenheck 4. VAV Boxes: Price, Titus HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

219 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 5. Diffusers, Registers, Grilles: Price, Krueger PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 STATEMENT A. All Heating, ventilation and air conditioning shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of all governing authorities. 3.2 LOCATIONS AND ACCESSIBILITY A. Drawings indicate desired location and arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment and other items, and are to be followed as closely as possible. All offsets and interferences may not be indicated due to the scale of the Drawings. Coordinate work with all other trades. B. Valves, motors, controls and other devices requiring service, maintenance and adjustment shall be placed in fully accessible positions and locations. Provide access doors where required in ductwork and construction and render all such devices accessible. 3.3 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PREMISES A. Clean equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surfaces to be painted smooth, clean, and ready for painters. Clean entire premise of unused materials, rubbish, debris, grease spots and dirt left by subcontractors. Remove, clean and replace pipeline strainers after systems have been in operation for a period of 30 calendar days. 3.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Install per manufacturer s recommendations. 3.5 ACCESSIBILITY A. Install work readily accessible for normal operation, reading of instruments, adjustment, service, inspection and repair. Provide access panels where indicated and required. 3.6 AIR DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS A. Air distribution equipment locations shall be coordinated with architectural drawings. 3.7 TURNING VANES A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all right angle sharp turns in ducts. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

220 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 3.8 DUCT LINING A. Where indicated, specified duct dimensions are net clear dimensions, i.e., clear dimensions, after insulation has been installed. 3.9 REPAIR OR EXISTING SURFACES A. Contractor shall provide and be responsible for protection and repair of adjacent existing surfaces and areas that may have been damaged as a result of demolition and new work CAPPING OF DUCTS A. All existing ducts that are removed and not reused shall be capped airtight and sealed with "miracle" duct sealer and D-617 or equal CEILING DIFFUSER COORDINATION A. Contractor shall strictly coordinate all ceiling diffusers and grilles with architectural reflected ceiling plan. If any discrepancies are encountered, the engineer shall be notified for clarification THERMOSTAT LOCATION A. Contractor shall coordinate final location of all thermostats with architect and tenant construction coordinator prior to any rough-in installation work. Coordinated shop drawings showing thermostats, sensors, switches, and all other wall devices should be provided to the design team for review. B. Provide insulated backing on all thermostats located on exterior walls so fluctuations in wall temperature do not provide false readings. Verify that thermostats will not be installed in direct sunlight. C. Provide white thermostat covers for all locations within scope of work AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall provide record as-built drawings to tenant construction coordinator and architect at the completion of tenant construction THERMOSTAT REQUIREMENTS A. Room thermostats shall be capable of being set to maintain space temperature set points for 55 degrees to 85 degrees and shall be capable of operating the heating and cooling in sequence. Thermostats shall be adjustable to provide a temperature range of 5 degrees between full heating and full cooling being supplied. Temperature control system shall operate in accordance with the base building sequence of operation. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

221 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 3.15 DUCT ELBOWS A. Provide minimum duct radius on elbows at one and one half times duct sizes DIFFUSER THROW PATTERN A. All ceiling diffusers shown on the plans shall be provided as four way throw unless otherwise noted. Pattern blades shall be set in a horizontal position unless otherwise noted DUCTWORK REQUIREMENTS OF UMC A. All ductwork shall conform to chapter 6 of the Uniform Mechanical Code DUCT AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS OF TITLE 24 A. All supply air ducts shall be installed per Title 24 regulations RETURN AIR PLENUM REQUIREMENTS A. Return air plenum shall not contain any combustible material ACCESS REQUIREMENTS A. Provide access and clearance requirements per 2001 Mechanical code and manufacture installation whichever is more restrictive DUCTWORK PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. At the time of rough installation or during storage on the construction site and until final startup of the heating and cooling equipment, all ducts and other related air distribution component openings shall be covered with tape and plastic to reduce the amount of dust and debris which may collect in the system TEMPORARY VENTILATION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The permanent HVAC system shall only be used during construction if necessary to condition the building within the required temperature range for material and equipment installation. If the HVAC system is used during construction, use return air filters with MERV-8 Filtration. Replace all filters immediately prior to occupancy. END OF SECTION HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)

222 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 3. Division-1. B. Organization of the Specifications into Divisions, Sections and Articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the contract work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any trade. 1.2 GENERAL SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK A. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover a complete installation of systems. The omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such additional labor and materials. B. Refer to the Drawings and Shop Drawings of other trades for additional details, which affect the proper installation of this work. Diagrams and symbols showing electrical connections are diagrammatic only. Wiring diagrams do not necessarily show the exact physical arrangement of the equipment. C. Before submitting a bid, the Contractor shall become familiar with all existing features of the building and the Building Drawings, which may affect the execution of the work. No extra payment will be allowed for failure to obtain this information. D. If there are omissions or conflicts between the Drawings and Specifications, clarify these points with the Owner s Representative before submitting bid and before commencing work. E. Provide Work and Material in conformance with the Manufacturer s published recommendations for respective equipment and systems. 1.3 LOCATIONS OF EQUIPMENT A. The Drawings indicate diagrammatically the desired locations or arrangements of conduit runs, outlets, equipment, etc., and are to be followed as closely as possible. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

223 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structure conditions encountered. B. Where outlets are placed on a wall, locate symmetrically with respect to each other and other features or finishes on the wall. C. In the event changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary, due to unforeseen conditions, developed conditions in the building construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, such changes shall be made without cost to the contract, providing the change is ordered before the conduit runs, etc., and work directly connected to same is installed and no extra materials are required. D. Coordinate and cooperate in every way with other trades in order to avoid interference and assure a satisfactory job. E. The location of the existing electrical devices, equipment and conduit shown on the Drawings is approximate. Verify exact locations and routing of existing systems. 1.4 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING, PLUMBING EQUIPMENT WIRING Provide electrical work, materials, and control components required for proper operation of the air conditioning, heating and plumbing systems as indicated on the Electrical, Mechanical, and Plumbing Contract Documents and specified herein. 1.5 PERMITS Take out and pay for all required permits, inspections and examinations without additional cost to the Owner. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations as follows. The following publications shall be included in the Contract Documents requirements. If a conflict occurs between the following publications and any other part of the Contract Documents, the requirements describing the more restrictive provisions shall become the applicable Contract definition: 1. California Code of Regulations Title California Part 3 "California Electrical Code" CEC, Title 24 and Title 8 "Division of Industrial Safety". 3. California Building Code - CBC. 4. The National Electrical Code. 5. The National Life Safety Code. 6. The Uniform Building Code-UBC. 7. National Fire Protection Agency-NFPA. 8. Underwriter s Laboratory-UL. 9. Other applicable State and Local Government Agencies laws and regulations. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

224 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 10. Electrical Installation Standards National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) and National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS): a. NECA/NEIS-1: Standard of Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting b. NECA/NEIS-101: Standard for Installing Steel Conduit (Rigid, IMC, etc.) c. NECA/NEIS-305: Standard for Fire Alarm System Job Practice d. NEIS/NECA Recommended Practice for & IESNA-500: Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems B. All Material and Equipment shall be new and shall be delivered to the site in unbroken packages. All material and equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories or other recognized testing laboratories, where such listings are available. Comply with all installation requirements and restrictions pertaining to such listings. C. Work and Material shown on the Drawings and in the Specifications is new and included in the Contract unless specifically indicated as existing or N.I.C. (not in contract). D. Keep a copy of all applicable Codes and Standards available at the job site at all times for reference while performing work under this Contract. Nothing in Plans or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to the most stringent of Building Codes. E. Where a conflict or variation occurs between applicable Codes, Standards and/or the Contract Documents, the provisions of the most restrictive provision shall become the requirement of the Contract Documents. 1.7 SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. General 1. Review of Contractor's submittals is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. Contractor is responsible for quantities; dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site; fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordination of work with that of all other trades and satisfactory performance of their work. 2. The Contractor shall review each submittal in detail for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents prior to submittal. The Contractor shall "Ink Stamp" and sign each item of the submittal with a statement "CERTIFYING THE SUBMITTAL HAS BEEN REVIEWED BY THE CONTRACTOR AND COMPLIES WITH ALL THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS". The Contractor shall clearly and specifically identify each individual proposed substitution, substitution of equal or proposed deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents with a statement "THIS ITEM IS A SUBSTITUTION". The burden of research, preparation of calculations and the furnishing of adequate and complete Shop Drawings information to demonstrate the suitability of Contractor s proposed substitutions and suitability of proposed deviations from the Contract Documents is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Departure from the submittal procedure will result in resubmittals and delays. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the submittal requirements shall render void any ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

225 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA acceptance or any approval of the proposed variation. The Contractor shall then be required to provide the equipment or method without variation from the Contract Documents and without additional cost to the Contract. 4. The Contractor at no additional cost or delays to the Contract shall remove any work, material and correct any deficiencies resulting from deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents not approved in advance by the Owner prior to commencement of work. 5. Shop Drawings submitted by the Contractor, which are not specifically required for submittal by the Contract Documents, or Contractor Shop Drawings previously reviewed and resubmitted without a written resubmittal request to the Contractor, will not be reviewed, considered, or commented on. The respective Shop Drawing submittal/ resubmittal will not be returned to the Contractor and will be destroyed without comment or response to the Contractor. The respective submittal shall be considered null and void as being not in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 6. Refer to Division-1 for additional requirements. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in completed bound groups of materials (i.e., all lighting fixtures or all devices, etc.). The Contractor shall verify dimensions of equipment and be satisfied as to fit and that they comply with all Code requirements relating to clear working space about electrical equipment prior to submitting Shop Drawings for review. Submittals, which are intended to be reviewed as substitution or departure from the Contract Documents, must be specifically noted as such. The requirements of the Contract Documents shall prevail regardless of the acceptance of the submittal. 2. Shop Drawings shall include catalog data sheets, instruction manuals, Dimensioned Plans, elevations, details, wiring diagrams and descriptive literature of component parts where applicable. 3. Each Shop Drawing item shall be identified with the Specification Section and paragraph numbers, lighting fixture types and Drawing sheet numbers; the specific Shop Drawing is intended to represent. Shop Drawings 11-inches x 17-inches or smaller in size shall be bound in 3-ring binders. Divider tabs shall be provided in the 3-ring binders identifying and separating each separate Shop Drawing submittal item. Shop Drawings larger than 11-inches x 17-inches Shop Drawing pages/sheets submittals shall be sequentially numbered with unique alphanumeric numbering system to facilitate correspondence referencing identification of individual sheets. 4. The time required to review and comment on the Contractor s submittals will not be less than 14 calendar days, after receipt of the submittals at the office of FBA Engineering. The review of Contractor submittals and return to Contractor of submittals with review comments will occur in a timely manner conditioned upon the Contractor complying with all of the following: a. The submittals contain complete and accurate information, complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Contractor s submittals are each marked with Contractor s approval stamp, and with Contractor signatures. c. The submittals are received in accordance with a written, Shop Drawing submittal schedule for each submittal. The Contractor distributes the schedule not less than 35-day calendar days in advance of the Shop Drawing Submittals, and the schedule identifies the calendar dates, the Contractor will deliver the various submittals for review. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

226 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 5. Shop Drawings shall include the Manufacturers projected days for shipment from the factory of completed equipment, after the Contractor releases the equipment for production. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to insure that all material and equipment is ordered in time to provide an orderly progression of the work. The Contractor shall notify the Owner s Representative of any changes in delivery, which would affect the project completion date. 6. Submittal Identification a. Each submittal shall be dated: with submittal transmission date; sequentially numbered and titled with submittal contents identification and applicable Specification/Drawing references (i.e., Submittal dated: 5/12/98 Submittal #4 Contents: Branch circuit panelboards Sheet #E5.1 and transformers Specification Section Paragraph 2.11, etc.). b. Each resubmittal shall be dated: with original submittal date and resubmittal transmission dates; sequentially numbered with original submittal number and sequential resubmittal revision number and titled with submittal contents identification and applicable Specifications/Drawing references (i.e., Original Submittal Date: 5/12/98 Resubmittal Date: 10/9/98 Original Submittal #4 resubmittal Revision R2 Contents: Transformer resubmittal Specification Section Paragraph 2.11, etc.) C. The Contractor shall be responsible for incidental, direct and indirect costs resulting from the Contractor s substitution of; or changes to; the specified Contract Materials and Work. D. The Contractor shall pay, upon request by the Owner s Representative, a fee for the Owner s Representative time involved in the review of substitution submittals and design changes resulting from the Contractor s requested substitutions. The fee shall be not less than $ per hour but, in no case, less than stated in Division-1, whichever is greater. E. Maintenance and Operating Manuals 1. The Contractor shall furnish three copies of typewritten maintenance and operating manuals for all electrical equipment, fire alarm equipment, etc., to the Owner. 2. Maintenance and operating manuals shall be bound in three-ring, hard-cover, plastic binders with table of contents. Manuals shall be delivered to the Owner s Representative, with an itemized receipt. F. Portable or Detachable Parts: The Contractor shall retain in his possession, and shall be responsible for all portable and detachable parts or portions of the installation such as fuses, keys, locks, adapters, locking clips, and inserts until final completion of Contract Work. These parts shall then be delivered to the Owner s Representative with an itemized receipt. G. Record Drawings (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) 1. Provide and maintain in good order a complete set of Electrical Contract "Record" prints. Changes to the Contract to be clearly recorded on this set of prints. At the end of the project, transfer all changes to one set of transparencies to be delivered unfolded to the Owner s Representative. 2. The Contractor shall keep the "Record" prints up to date and current with all work performed. 3. Refer to Division-1 for additional requirements. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

227 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 1.8 CLEANING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, PREMISES All parts of the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, rust, cement, plaster, etc., and all cracks and corners scraped out clean. Surfaces to be painted shall be carefully cleaned of grease and oil spots and left smooth, clean and in proper condition to receive paint finish. 1.9 JOB CONDITIONS - PROTECTION Protect all work, materials and equipment from damage from any cause whatever and provide adequate and proper storage facilities during the progress of the work. Provide for the safety and good condition of all the work until final acceptance of the work by the Owner and replace all damaged or defective work, materials and equipment before requesting final acceptance CUTTING AND PATCHING ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Perform cutting and patching of the construction work required for the proper installation of the electrical work. 2. Patching shall be of the same material, thickness, workmanship and finish as existing and accurately match surrounding work to the satisfaction of the Owner s Representative IDENTIFICATION A. Wire and Cable Identification 1. Provide identification on individual wire and cable including fire alarm, electrical power systems (each individual phase, neutral and ground), empty conduit pull ropes, and controls circuit. 2. Permanent identification shall be provided at each termination location, splice location, pullbox, junction box and equipment enclosure. a. Individual wire and cable larger than #6 AWG or 0.25 inch diameter, shall be provided with polypropylene identification tag holders, with yellow polypropylene tags interchangeable black alphanumeric characters, character height 0.25 inch. Attach identification tags with plastic tie wraps, minimum of two for each tag. As manufactured by Almetek Industries- EZTAG Series; or TECH Products - EVERLAST Series. b. Individual wire and cable #6 AWG and smaller or smaller than 0.25 inch diameter, shall be provided with water and oil resistant, flexible, pressure sensitive machine embossed plastic tags that wrap a minimum of 360 degrees around the wire/cable diameter. The entire tag shall then be covered with a clear flexible waterproof plastic cover wrapped a minimum of 540 degrees around the wire/cable diameter and completely covering the identification. c. Each identification tag location shall indicate the following information: circuit number, circuit phase, source termination and destination termination equipment name (or outlet number as applicable). 3. Install permanent identification after installation/pulling of wire/cable is complete, to prevent loss or damage to the identification. B. Panelboard circuit directory cards shall be updated for all panelboards affected under this project. List of circuits shall be typewritten on card. Circuit description shall include name or number of circuit, area, and connected load. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

228 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA C. Junction and pull boxes shall have covers stenciled with box number when shown on the Drawings, or circuit numbers according to panel schedule. Data shall be lettered in a conspicuous manner with a color contrasting to finish POWER OUTAGES A. All Electrical Services in all occupied facilities of the Contract Work are to remain operational during the entire Contract period. Any interruption of the electrical services for the performance of this work shall be at the convenience of the Owner and performed only after consultation with the Owner s Representative. Work involving circuit outages shall be only at such a time and of such a duration as approved in writing. Work involving circuit outages for the work required to connect new equipment and disconnect existing equipment shall be performed at the convenience of the Owner. B. Work involving system outages to the building fire alarm system shall be performed only after consultation with the Owner and shall be only at such a time and of such duration as approved in writing. C. Provide overtime work; double shift work; night time work; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work to meet outages schedule. D. Provide temporary electrical power to meet the requirements of this Article. E. Any added costs to Contractor due to necessity of complying with this Article shall be included in the Contract Scope of Work. F. When electrical work involving power disruptions to existing areas is initiated, the work shall proceed on a continuous basis without stopping until electric power is restored to the affected areas. G. The Contractor shall request in writing to the Owner s Representative a minimum of 3-weeks in advance, for any proposed electrical outage ASBESTOS, POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYL (PCB) OR HAZARDOUS WASTE: A. It is understood and agreed that this contract does not contemplate the handling of asbestos, PCB or any hazardous waste material. If asbestos, PCB or any hazardous waste material is encountered, notify the Owner s Representative immediately. Do not disturb, handle or attempt to remove. B. Lighting Fixture Demolition Hazardous Materials 1. The removal of existing lighting fixtures will generate hazardous material waste disposal Contract Documents. a. The existing lighting fixture lamps contain mercury. 2. Remove, handle, store, contain, dispose of and document the hazardous materials resulting from existing lighting fixtures work, as part of the Contract requirements. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

229 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 1.14 ELECTRICAL WORK CLOSEOUT A. Prepare the following items and submit to the Owner s Representative before final acceptance. 1. Two copies of Local and/or State Code Enforcing Authority s Final Inspection Certificates. 2. Copies of record Drawings as required under the General Conditions, pertinent Division One Sections and Electrical General Provisions. 3. Two copies of all receipts transferring portable or detachable parts to the Owner s Representative when requested. 4. Notify the Owner s Representative in writing when installation is complete and that a final inspection of this work can be performed. In the event any defect or deficiencies are found during this final inspection they shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner s Representative before final acceptance can be issued. END OF SECTION / ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

230 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. Submit product data sheets for all outlet boxes, floor boxes, cellular floor activation kits, wiring devices and device plates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. General 1. Flush or concealed outlet and junction boxes: Pressed steel, steel thickness not less than inch, hot-dip galvanized, knockout (KO) type with conduit entrances and quantities size to match conduits shown connecting to respective outlet box. UL-514 listed and labeled. Minimum required box depth is exclusive of extension-ring depth. 2. Provide boxes of proper code size for the number of wires or conduits passing through or terminating therein, but in no case shall box be less than 4.0 inch square by inch deep, unless specified elsewhere or noted otherwise on the Drawings. 2.5 inch minimum depth for box widths exceeding 2-gang. 3. Increase the minimum outlet box size to 4.69 inches square by not less than inches deep, where one or more of the following conditions occurs: a. More than two conduits connect to the outlet box. b. Conduit homerun connects to outlet box. 4. Provide extension rings on flush outlets to finish face of extension ring flush with finished building surfaces. Extension ring shall match outlet box construction and contain "attachment mounting-tabs" for wiring devices. Extension rings shall be "screwattached" to respective outlet box and maintain "ground" bonding continuity. 5. Boxes installed in masonry or concrete shall be UL "concrete-tight" approved for installation in concrete, and shall allow the placing of conduit without displacing reinforcing bars. 6. Provide fixture-supporting device in outlet boxes for surface mounted fixtures as required. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

231 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 7. Provide solid gang boxes for three or more switches, for mounting behind a common device plate. 8. Provide barriers for all 277 volt devices, between line voltage and low voltage devices and where more than one device is installed in an outlet box. 9. Individual audio/visual, telephone, computer or data outlets: 4.69 inch square by inch deep minimum with single gang extension ring on flush boxes. 10. Combination signal/telephone/data or computer outlets: 4.69 inch square by inch deep minimum with single gang wide extension ring on flush boxes. B. Surface Outlet Boxes 1. Surface mounted outlet boxes, cast iron Type FS or FD, with threaded hubs as required. Box interior dimensions and interior volume capacity not less than required for press steel boxes, and sheet steel boxes. Provide plugs in all unused openings. Provide weatherproof gaskets for all exterior boxes. 2.2 PULL BOXES A. Sizes as indicated on the Drawings and in no case of less size or material thickness than required by the Governing Code. 1. General purpose sheet steel pull boxes: Install only in dry protected locations with removable screw covers. Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finishes. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Provide circuit switches totally enclosed, Bakelite or composition base, toggle type with 277 volt AC rating for full capacity or contacts for incandescent or fluorescent lamp loads. Switch ratings shall be 20 ampere only. Switches shall be Decora style. Color as selected by Owner s Representative. B. Where switches are mounted in multiple gang assembly and are operating at 277 volts and/or 277 volts and 120 volts mounted in same outlet box, there shall be a barrier installed between each switch. C. Switches 1. Single Pole Switches Make Decora Type Leviton # Three-Way Switches Make Toggle Type Leviton # DIMMER SWITCHES A. Dimmer switches shall be as indicated herein unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. B. Dimmer cover plate shall be the same color as switch cover plates in the same area. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

232 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA C. Dimmer switches shall be self-cooling and shall not require forced air cooling when individually or gang mounted. All dimmers shall be by the same Manufacturer and the same appearance. D. Dimmers shall include "RF" filters and is voltage stabilized. E. Incandescent dimmers shall be used for control of line voltage incandescent light fixtures except "low voltage" type lights. Lutron "Centurion" series. 1. Dimmer wattage shall be rated 2000 watt unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. F. Fluorescent dimmers, voltages as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Fluorescent dimmers (individual dimmers controlling less than 24 lamps per dimmer) Lutron "Nova" Series. 2. Fluorescent dimmers (more than 24 lamps) a. Lutron #FDA-40 up to 40 lamps per controller. b. Lutron #FDA-80 up to 80 lamps per controller. c. Provide a minimum of 3-20 amp on all 120 volt units and on 277V 80-amp units. d. Control stations Lutron "Nova" series. e. Provide all material and labor for a complete and operable system. G. Low voltage (transformer type) incandescent light dimmers shall be specifically designed for dimming low voltage light fixture transformers. Lutron "Nova". 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. All receptacles in flush type outlet boxes shall be installed with a bonding jumper to connect the box to the receptacle ground terminal. Grounding through the receptacle mounting straps is not acceptable. The bonding jumper shall be sized in accordance with the branch circuit protective device as tabulated herein under "Grounding". Bonding jumper shall be attached at each outlet to the back of the box using drilled and tapped holes and washer head screws 6-32 or larger (except isolated ground receptacles). For receptacles in surface mounted outlet boxes direct metal-to-metal contact between receptacle mounting strap (if it is connected to the grounding contacts) and outlet box may be used. Receptacles shall be Decora style. Color as selected by Owner s Representative. B. Duplex convenience receptacles shall be grounding type, 120 volt, 15 amp and shall have two current carrying contacts and one grounding contact which are internally connected to the frame. Outlet shall accommodate standard parallel blade cap and shall be side wired: 1. Leviton #16242 C. Isolated Ground Receptacles 1. The receptacle insulation barrier shall isolate the receptacle ground contact system from ground. Connect the ground plug contact to a separate dedicated insulated groundbonding conductor. The receptacle ground plug contact shall not be grounded to the raceway or outlet box. Duplex convenience receptacle 20 amp minimum, with two current carrying contacts and one grounding contact, or as noted on the Drawings. 2. Identify receptacle with an orange triangle on the receptacle face and orange receptacle body. a. P & S IG6300 b. Leviton 536IGG BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

233 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. Hubbell CR5252IG D. Duplex 20 ampere convenience outlets same as 15 ampere except ampacity shall be used where duplex receptacles is supplied by separate 20-ampere circuit: 1. Leviton # E. Special outlets shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2.6 PLATES Provide plates for every switch, receptacle, telephone, computer, television and other device outlets. All plates shall be nylon or high impact thermoplastic. Color as selected by Owners Representative. Plates shall be manufactured by P&S, Hubbell, Leviton or General Electric only. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GROUNDING (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. Grounding shall be executed in accordance with all applicable Codes and Regulations, both of the State of California and local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Each pull box or any other enclosure in which several ground wires are terminated shall be equipped with a ground bus secured to the interior of the enclosure. The bus shall have a separate lug for each ground conductor. No more than one conductor shall be installed per lug. C. The maximum resistance to ground shall not exceed 5 ohms. 3.2 OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Accurately place boxes and securely fastens to structural members. Where outlets are shown at same location but at different mounting heights, install outlets in one vertical line. Where outlets are shown at same location and mounting height, mount outlets as close together in a horizontal row as possible. Where the outlet boxes for switches and receptacles are shown at the same location and mounting height, mount in common outlet box with barriers between devices. Provide single piece multi-gang cover plate for close mounted outlet boxes. Where switches are shown on wall adjacent to hinge side of doors, box shall be installed to clear door when door is fully opened. B. Flush mounted boxes shall be attached to two studs or structure members by means of metal supports. C. Boxes above accessible ceilings shall be attached to structural members. Where boxes are suspended, they shall be supported independently of conduit system by means of hanger rods and/or preformed steel channels. Boxes shall be supported independently of all piping, ductwork, equipment, ceiling hanger wires and suspended ceiling grid system. D. Surface mounted outlets shall be attached to concrete or masonry walls by means of expansion shields. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

234 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA E. Floor boxes shall be installed level with finish floor and within adjustable limits of floor ring. Where outlets are shown at same or adjacent location, use multi-gang boxes. F. Outlet Box Horizontal and Vertical Separation: Outlet boxes and device outlet rings installed flush in walls shall be horizontally and vertically separated by not less than 24 inches (edge of box to edge of box) from device outlet boxes and rings in common wall surfaces located on the opposite (back) side of the same wall. 1. Where the separation cannot be maintained, provide a solid backing behind and completely enclosing each outlet box. 2. The backing shall extend the width of the wall cavity (i.e., between "studs" or masonry cells) behind the box and 12 inches above and below the outlet box centerline, completely enclosing the outlet box. 3. The backing shall consist of the following: a. 5/8 inch thick gypsum board anchored in place for "stud" wall construction. b. Solid "mortar" to completely fill the outlet box "cell" behind the box in masonry construction. G. In fire rated walls and ceilings provide fire rated "box-wrap" around the outside of each outlet box placed in fire rated wall or ceiling inside the wall, to maintain the fire rating of wall with the installed outlet boxes. 3.3 DIMMER SWITCHES A. Do not break off dimmer cooling fins. B. Large dimmers shall be surface wall mounted at the location indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION / BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

235 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE (Computer/Data, Telephone/Voice, TV, Security/Access Control) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other Specifications Sections and Drawings for related work required to be included as work under Division General provisions and requirements for electrical work. B. Provide electronic network systems infrastructure for the following systems: 1. Data and Telephone Systems. 2. TV Systems. 3. Security and Access Control Systems. C. Site Conditions: 1. Note that any given site s conditions will vary significantly from location to location, floor to floor, and time to time; various working conditions exist, but generally the areas are office spaces and may be occupied by City employees and the Public; environmental conditions will vary for each location. 2. Inspect each site prior to providing subsequent quotations to ensure that you have factored in all of the requirements. 3. Your submission of a bid constitutes acknowledgment of the site conditions requirements and that you have incorporated this condition into your bid. 4. Installation equipment, materials, and product will ONLY be allowed to be kept in specified areas. Hallways, office areas lobbies etc. are not suitable for storage and the City will NOT be held liable for missing or stolen equipment. 5. The Contractor will exercise reasonable care to avoid damaging City facilities and is responsible for timely repair of damage to City facilities due to carelessness of their workmen. The Contractor must immediately report to the City any damage to the facility that may exist or may occur during the occupancy of the quarters. 6. At the end of each shift or workday, Contractor will be required to remove trash, debris, spent reels, and all other refuse related to this installation and at a minimum broom clean work areas Contractors are to supply their own tools and equipment, especially brooms, dustpans, ladders etc. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor must remove his tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the premises and must leave the premises clean and neat. 7. The Contractor will obtain the City s permission before cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as beams, girders, concrete, or tile floors, partitions and ceilings. 8. Any work that will cause noticeable dust near the work area, e.g. indoor core-boring, contractor must provide protection to prevent dust from migrating from the work area into LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

236 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA other areas of the building e.g. provide a temporary structure/enclosure is to be erected to contain all indoor core-boring locations. Timely cleanup of debris related to boring is the responsibility of the contractor. Work area is to be cleaned and returned to an as found condition. This will include but not be limited to water control and abatement, floor washing, vacuuming, carpet cleaning, furniture dusting, furniture cleaning and furniture washing by a professional cleaning service as needed. 1.2 SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. Drawings Submittals 1. Drawings shall be submitted as pdf files and AutoCAD 2016 data files. 2. Submit redrawn Building Floor Plan for each building area, same scale as the Contract Drawing. 3. Plans shall show walls, doors, windows, furniture, infrastructure, outlets and network systems equipment locations. Show point-to-point interconnecting cables, pathways, conduit, conduit sizes, circuit types, along with circuit identification names, numbers and quantities between all components. 4. Provide scaled elevation Drawings of each equipment rack, terminal blocks, terminal backboard and terminal room/closet showing location and arrangement of each equipment component, outlet and cable training provisions, with estimated weight of each complete assembly. 5. Submit block wiring diagrams showing major system components, outlets, equipment racks, terminal blocks, signal loss with interconnecting circuit conductors, splices, portable patch cords and connectors. Riser type diagram shall be provided if the building has more than one floor level, with information shown on riser diagram corresponding for each respective floor. B. Submit Manufacturer's standard catalog data for each component. The submittal shall be arranged in the order of the Specification and shall list the Specification paragraph number, the name, the proposed model and Manufacturer for each item as well as a reference indicating the specific piece of data which can be easily located in the brochure. The Manufacturer's data sheets shall be marked to indicate the specific item being proposed in cases where the sheet covers several types or sizes of items. The data sheet shall completely describe the proposed item. Where modification to the equipment is necessary to meet the operational requirements of the Contract Documents, the brochure shall include complete mechanical and electrical Shop Drawings, detailing the modification. The brochure shall include a listing of the outlet rough-in requirements for every device and equipment item. The applicable symbol which illustrates that rough-in item on the job plans shall be drawn on the proposal, opposite the description of the rough-in to facilitate locating the data by Field Personnel. Submit elevation and dimensional information. C. Performance Calculation: 1. Provide engineered calculations showing the Passive Cable System Signal Attenuation losses of the proposed installed system. The intent is not to require calculations for every system segment, port and outlet. The intent is to require engineered calculations for proposed typical worst case port to port; head end to farthest distance outlet and patch port to outlet signal attentions. 2. Provide calculations for a minimum of twenty-five complete channel/circuit paths. The calculations shall include attenuation insertion loses for each system component including individually itemized cable-fiber/wire; outlet, termination, connector, electronic LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

237 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA component (if any), coupler and patch cord along the entire path from the head end equipment to the end use outlet. 3. The calculations shall serve as the basis for verifying the system performance with the system testing specified in the Contract Documents. D. Provide proposed P-Touch labeling and outlet identification/color coding system. Indicate proposed identification naming sequence and methods, itemized for review. E. Submit Manufacturer certified test reports showing test documentation for the proposed material that the material meets or exceeds the performance standards defined in the Contract Documents. The testing and results shall reflect worst case performance based on a minimum of ten samples. Tests shall be certified by a nationally recognized independent Test Lab (i.e., ETL, UL, etc.). The Manufacturer shall certify in writing the material has been manufactured and tested to comply with the requirements defined in the Contract Documents. 1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The equipment shall be UL listed, labeled, and approved for the application shown in the Contract Documents. B. The complete system material, equipment, testing, installation and workmanship shall comply with the mandatory requirements and the guideline/ recommendation requirements of the following latest published version, supplements, latest revision including Addendums and TSB. Both the mandatory and advisory criteria shall be included as requirements of the Contract Documents: 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-D: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards. 2. TIA/TSB-140: Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1, Performance Specification for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling. 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-D: Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-B, Administrative Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. 6. ANSI/J-STD-607-C: Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. 7. ANSI/TIA-1152, Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair cabling. 8. TSB-184-A, Guidelines for Supporting Power Delivery over Balanced Twisted-Pair cabling. 9. TSB-162-A, Telecommunications Cabling Guidelines for Wireless Access Points. 10. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 13 th edition. 11. National Electrical Code (NEC) and California Electrical Code (CEC) including but not limited to Articles-770 and 800 with ETL testing and local Code Jurisdictions. 12. NECA/NEIS, National Electrical Contractors Association, National Electrical Installation Standards: a. 301 Standards for Installation and Testing for Fiber Optic. b. 568 Standard for Installation Building Telecommunications Cabling. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

238 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. 607 Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding. 13. Manufacturer's recommendations for the respective equipment. 14. The data drop specification, associated drawings. C. The entire completed electronic network systems infrastructure shall be tested and provide electronic data/network and telephone/voice multi-channel communications for the following protocols: 1. IEEE 802.3/ETHERNET latest revisions and standards: a. 10 Mbps 10Base-T, 100Mbps 100Base-Tx, 1000 Mbps (1Gbps) 1000 Base-Tx and 10,000 Mbps (10Gbps) 10Gb Base-Tx for copper wire. b. 10Mbps 10Base-F1, 100Mbps 100Base-FX, 1000Mbps 1000Base-Lx-Sx and ,000 Mbps (10Gbps) for fiber optics. IEEE 802.5/TOKEN RING. APPLETALK (Phone-net). FDDI - Distributed data interface on fiber or copper wire, 100Mbps. 100VG - AnyLAN EIA RS-232. ANSI - TPPMD 55Mbps, 155Mbps and 622 Mbps Asynchronous Transfer Mode - ATM. D. The complete telephone/voice system shall be suitable for the telephone/voice analog and digital communications and VoIP protocols. The system shall be compatible with the telephone/voice equipment installed as part of the Contract. E. The complete television/video audio systems shall be suitable or for the television/ video audio equipment installed as part of the Contract. F. Installation of all equipment, devices, splices, terminations, cables, outlets, etc. shall comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. 1.4 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATIONS A. Equipment 1. The Supplier of the equipment shall be the Factory Authorized Distributor and service facility for the brands of equipment and material provided. 2. Network systems infrastructure equipment and materials shall all be the product of the same Manufacturer. All cabling shall be Belden Category 6 plenum rated. No substitutions and no alternate bids will be considered. Color as follows: a. Data Cabling Blue b. Voice Cabling White 3. Provide all connectivity items including without limitation modular jacks, inserts, splices, modular patch panels and the like which are fully compatible with and meets the Manufacturers listed above Specifications and warranty requirements. B. Installation Certification 1. Work and material for cables, cable terminations, outlets and related components for infrastructure systems shall be performed by Certified Installers. The Installer shall be certified by the respective Product Manufacturers. 2. The Manufacturers of the indicated work and material shall provide an Installer education/training and certification program for the supplied products. 3. The Installers performing the Contract Work for the indicated products shall have LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

239 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA attended and successfully completed each of the respective Manufacturer's installation training education programs for the specified products. 4. Submit six copies of the Manufacturer's Certifications for each Installer performing the work. The submittal shall be approved by the OWNER'S Representative prior to initiating any related Contract Work. 5. Contract material installed and work performed by Installers not complying with these requirements shall be removed. Removal of work and material not in compliance with these requirements shall done at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the Contract and without any additional Contract completion due date extensions. New material and work required to replace the non-compiling removed work and material shall be provided at the CONTRACTOR'S expense, without any additional cost to the Contract and without any additional Contract completion due date extensions. C. Extended Material and Performance Warranties 1. In addition to the warranty requirements described elsewhere in the Contract Documents, provide the following extended material and performance warranties. The warranty period shall be for not less than 25-years from the Contract Notice of Completion. 2. Warranty scope includes materials and performance for network cables and terminations, network workstation plug-in outlets, and patch panel plug-in outlets, cable splices and connectors. 3. Repair or replace the defective material with new material at the Project premise, to comply with the performance standards outlined in the Contract Documents during the warranty period. 4. Submit seven copies of proposed warranty statements, with Shop Drawing submittals. 1.5 ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation ACR AHJ Backbone db dbm Demarc ft. GHZ Horizontal Wiring and/or Horizontal Connection, and/or Horizontal wiring IDF KM kpsi m Mbps MDF Terminology Attenuation to Cross Talk Authority Having Jurisdiction Interconnections between MDF and IDF locations Decibel Decibel referenced to a milliwatt Demarcation location where operational control change or ownership change occurs Feet Gigahertz Interconnections from individual workstation outlets homerun back to IDF/MDF equipment racks, interconnections between individual workstation outlet location to IDF or MDF Intermediate distribution frame (horizontal or vertical cross connect) for an individual building area/floor Kilometer-lKM 1000 pounds per square inch Meter=39.37 inches Megabits per second Main distribution frame (central/main cross connect) for multi-building site or for a single individual building LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

240 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA Mhz Megahertz micron Micrometer mm Millimeter=l0-3 meter NEXT Near end cross talk nm Nanometer=10-9 meter pf Picofarad=10-12 farad RTDE Equipment rack mount fiber optic termination distribution enclosure, with fiber optic patch panel RMSE Equipment rack mount fiber optic enclosure, splice only, (without patch panel) STP Shielded twisted pairs copper wire ScTP Shield Screened twisted pairs copper wire um Micrometer=10-6 meter USE Universal splice enclosure UTP Unshielded twisted pairs copper Wire VOIP Voice communications over internet protocol WGNA WideBand Gigabit Networking Alliance Workstation or Spaces remote from the MDF/IDF terminal room/ Workstation location closet, where occupant interacts with the electronic systems infrastructure equipment connection device WMIC Wall mount fiber optic cable interface cabinet 1.6 MATERIALS AND METHODS A. Copper: Furnish only Belden category 6 plenum rated blue for data and white for voice cabling for use on this procurement; there are NO substitutions on this procurement, and NO alternate bids will be considered. B. Fiber: Furnish only Honeywell Genesis Series 3196 access control composite plenum cable with jacket and an overall jacket; there are NO substitutions on this procurement, and NO alternate bids will be considered. C. All material shall be new and must not be used, pre-owned, returned, remanufactured, reconditioned or have its serial numbers registered as sold to a previous customer or vendor. D. Material and labor not complying with the Contract Documents shall be removed by the Contractor from the project site. Material and labor complying with the Contract Documents shall be provided. E. All the cost to remove deficient work and material, provide work and material complying with the Contract Documents and the direct, indirect, incidental damages and Contract delays resulting from complying with these requirements shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and shall be included in the bid price. F. Furnish connectivity items including without limitation modular jacks, inserts, splices, modular patch panels, and the like, which are fully compatible with and meet or better then manufactures listed above specifications and warranty requirements. G. Furnish all other components required to complete the project that meet or better then manufactures listed above requirements to ensure that the warranty is not voided and is intact. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

241 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA H. Bid all or none (no exclusions). I. If awarded, when providing quotes on actual jobs, if items are not listed on the Planet Bid Line Items, show manufacturer s list price, so we can apply your quoted discount and calculate item price to the City. Pricing should include consumables, such as screws, washers, etc. necessary to complete the requirements of the given jobs, in all subsequent quotations. J. System Performance Requirements 1. The work, performance and type of materials provided as part of the Contract shall comply with the following ANSI/TIA/EIA-568D and related standards for all Electronics Network Systems Infrastructure work and materials described in the Specifications and shown the Drawings: a. Computer/data network systems: Category-6 b. Telephone/intercom voice systems: Category-6 2. The Electronic Network Systems Infrastructure system shall be based on star-topology for MDF to IDF backbone connections and workstation outlet to MDF/IDF horizontal connections. 1.7 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work must be approved and coordinated by the City s IS Manger or his/her designate. Any work that has the potential to disrupt normal City operations shall be scheduled and performed so as to minimize work interruptions, including performing work after-hours on holidays and/or weekends. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER WIRE CABLES (TWISTED PAIRS) A. General 1. Conductors shall be copper wire, individually insulated and color coded, with multiple conductors arrange in twisted pairs. 2. An overall non-conductive jacket shall encase the copper wires and any shielding (where shielding is specified) shall also be encased by the jacket. 3. Cables shall be UL listed, complying with NEC National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Agency and NFPA requirements for each installation location shown. ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements. a. NEC and CEC - MPP/CMP (Plenum type locations and locations where not continuously enclosed inside conduit). b. NEC and CEC - MPR/CMR (Vertical riser type locations). c. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B; including related standards, amendments and TSB. 4. Electronic network systems infrastructure cables that are not installed inside conduit raceways. Electronic network systems infrastructure cables that are installed in concealed spaces including plenums and non-plenums; access floors, ceiling spaces, walls, floor, etc., and/or installed without continuous raceways. The cable insulation and jacket shall be listed and labeled Limited Combustible Cable (LC or LCC) and shall comply with the latest published revision of all of the following additional requirements. a. Limited combustible FHC-25/50 per UL b. NEC/CEC;CMP, additional listing/labeling where the install location is an LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

242 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA environmental air plenum, FHC-25/50-CMP. c. NFPA-90A; ceiling cavity plenums, wall cavity spaces and raised floor cavity plenums, limited-combustible. d. NFPA-5000; defines combustible material including wire and cable. e. NFPA-75 computer rooms and electronic equipment room. f. NFPA-13; spaces containing limited combustible loading. g. Shall qualify as 100% recyclable materials disposal. 5. The outer cable jacket shall be imprinted with date, Manufacturer s model and catalog number and Agency (AHJ) listing identification. 6. Cables installed in air plenums, air handling spaces and cables installed without raceway or conduit shall be UL listed and labeled for installation in air plenums. 7. Cables installed in raceways or conduits below grade, through in-grade manholes and pullboxes shall be rated for installation in water/wet locations. 8. All copper wire electronic network systems cable of the same type shall be produced by the same Manufacturer, including portable patch cables. 9. The outer jacket of cables with less than nine pair of conductors shall be color coded. The jacket color shall be different for each system type; multimedia; telephone/voice; computer/data network; and fiber cable jackets volt RMS insulation material for each data conductor shall be the same material; shall be the same electrical characteristics and shall be the same dielectric constant, for all data conductors contained within the respective common cable jacket, along the entire installed length of the cable. Data cables employing differing insulation materials for individual data conductors contained within a common cable jacket are not acceptable and shall not be provided. 11. Low-skew cable a. The skew rate (nominal velocity of propagation delay) between any twisted pair in a combination of 4-twisted pair conductors grouped in the same cable, shall not exceed 30 nano seconds between any wire pair contained in the conductor group, and as required by cable Category rating, over a cable length of 100 meters, for all frequencies up to the cable maximum frequency rating. 12. Copper wire cables with more than 25 twisted pairs of conductors shall be constructed with 25-pair binder groups of conductors. The cable binder groups shall be enclosed in colored binders and assembled to form a single cable. The twisted pair/binder groups shall be enclosed with multi-layer dielectric protective sheaths underneath a cable jacket enclosing the entire cable assembly. A corrugated metal 100% shield shall be provided under the cable jacket enclosing all conductors. B. Category-6 Computer/Data Cables UTP 1. Category-6 cables shall be tested and shall pass the ANSI/TIA/EIA test recommendations for Category Operation Characteristics: a. Wire size 23AWG solid copper (23AWG stranded copper for portable patch cables) b. Quantity of twisted pairs As indicated but in no case less than 4-pairs c. Impedance 100 OHM 15%, 1-250Mhz d. Maximum Signal Attenuation per 1000 ft. 1Mhz 4Mhz 8Mhz LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

243 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 10Mhz 16Mhz 20Mhz 25Mhz 31.25Mhz 62.5Mhz 100Mhz 200Mhz 250Mhz e. Maximum Capacitance 5.6nF/100m f. Worst Pair "NEXT" 1Mhz Loss Per/1000 ft. 4Mhz 8Mhz 10Mhz 16Mhz 20Mhz 25Mhz 31.25Mhz 62.5Mhz 100Mhz 200Mhz 250Mhz LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

244 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2.2 COPPER WIRE CABLES (COAXIAL) A. General 1. An overall non-conductive jacket shall encase the copper wires and shielding. 2. Cables shall be UL listed, complying with NEC National Electrical Code, National Fire Protection Agency and NFPA requirements for each installation location shown. ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements. In addition to the UL listing requirements for copper wire cables twisted pair, coaxial cable shall additionally be UL listed and labeled for each install location. a. NEC and CEC CATVP (Plenum type locations and locations where not continuously enclosed inside conduit). b. NEC and CEC - CATVR (Vertical riser type locations). c. NEC and CEC - CATV (Locations where continuously enclosed inside conduit). d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B; including related Standards, Amendments and TSB. 3. Electronic network systems infrastructure cables that are not installed inside conduit raceways. Electronic network systems infrastructure cables that are installed in concealed spaces including plenums and non-plenums; access floors, ceiling spaces, walls, floor, etc., and/or installed without continuous raceways. The cable insulation and jacket shall be listed and labeled Limited Combustible Cable (LC or LCC) and shall comply with the latest published revision of all of the following additional requirements. a. Limited combustible FHC-25/50 per UL b. NEC/CEC;CMP, additional listing/labeling where the install location is an environmental air plenum, FHC-25/50-CMP. c. NFPA-90A; ceiling cavity plenums, wall cavity spaces and raised floor cavity plenums, limited-combustible. d. NFPA-5000; defines combustible material including wire and cable. e. NFPA-75 computer rooms and electronic equipment room. f. NFPA-13; spaces containing limited combustible loading. g. Shall qualify as 100% recyclable materials disposal. 4. The outer cable jacket shall be imprinted with date, Manufacturer s model and catalog number and Agency (AHJ) listing identification. 5. Cables installed in air plenums, air handling spaces and cables installed without raceway or conduit shall be UL listed and labeled for installation in air plenums. 6. Cables installed in raceways or conduits below grade, through in-grade manholes and pullboxes shall be rated for installation in water/wet locations. 7. All copper wire electronic network systems cable of the same type shall be produced by the same Manufacturer, including portable patch cables. B. RG6 Coaxial Cables 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B cables. RG-6, Quad-Shield cables shall be tested and shall pass ANSI/TIA/EIA test recommendations for the cable type. Rated for both analog and digital RF signal circuits. 2. Operational characteristics: a. Single center conductor size: 18AWG stranded or solid bare copper. b. Velocity of propagation not less than: 82%. c. Impedance: 75-OHM +3-OHM. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

245 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA d. Maximum signal attenuation per 100 feet Baseband Video MHz Upstream Digital Cable MHz TV ch MHz FM Radio MHz TV Ch MHz CATV Ch MHz CATV Ch MHz CATV Ch MHz DBS MHz DBS MHz DBS MHz PCS Cell Phones MHz Wireless Cable MHz High Frequency MHZ e. Capacitance 16.2 pf/feet f. ASTM-D4566, 5 thru 4000 MHz Return Loss Headroom (RLH) not less than 20 db g. 100% sweep tested 5 MHz thru 4500 MHz 3. Four alternating layers of metal foil shielding and brass braiding shielding, 100% metallic shielding below the jacket and symmetrically enclosing the individual layers of dielectric insulation surrounding the center conductors. 2.3 COPPER WIRE OUTLET CONNECTORS A. General 1. Connectors shall comply with FCC part 68 Subpart F for gold plating. 2. Connectors shall be UL listed and shall comply with UL94V Provide a removable blank dust cover for each plug-in outlet insert. The dust cover shall protect the insert from contamination until a workstation or patch cord is "plugged" into the outlet. 4. Copper wire outlet connectors shall be color coded to distinguish telephone/ voice separately (white) from computer/data (blue). The outlet coverplate shall be labeled to identify telephone/voice, computer/data and other infrastructure outlets separately. 5. Copper wire outlet connectors shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements, ANSI/ TIA/EIA-568D including related Standards, Amendments and TSB. 6. All copper wire connectors shall be the product of the same Manufacturer B. Universal Outlet Connector (for twisted pair Copper Wire Premise/Workstation Wiring and copper wire patch panels). 1. General a. Connections for twisted pairs copper conductors shall provide a universal outlet connector between the building premise copper wire, and plug-in workstation locations. Patch panel/equipment plug-in connectors. The connector components shall assemble with "snap-in" spring loaded retainers to prevent dislocation during LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

246 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA insertion or removal of external plug-in devices. b. The contacts shall be gold plated with a 250 insertion/withdrawal cycle rating. c. Shall all be the product of the same Manufacturer. d. Unless specifically noted otherwise the universal outlet connector shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568D; related Standards, Amendments and TSB. e. Operational characteristics shall match or exceed and shall be compatible with the respective twisted pairs cable. f. A metal ground shield with EMI/RFI metal ground clip shall be provided where shielded cable is connected to the universal outlet connector for each universal outlet connector assembly. g. Each universal outlet connector shall consist of three major components. 1) Universal edge connector assembly. 2) Plug-in adapter inserts. 3) Connector housing. h. Provide snap-in blank removable insert covers for connector installed without plug-in adapter inserts. 2. Universal edge connector: a. Insulated assembly shall connect to the premise copper wire. The connectors shall be multiple plug type connector contacts, one contact (total of eight contacts) for each individual premise wire connection interconnected to the individual wire terminations. b. Connector shall provide insertion of individual insulated copper wire, gas tight, 110 style punch down/displacement termination, for AWG insulated premise wire. c. The edge connector assembly shall provide termination of eight separate wire conductors, twisted or untwisted pairs, solid or stranded, shielded or unshielded, with color codes and numbered identification of each contact. Integral cable/ conductor strain relief to prevent pullout of terminated premise wire conductors. 3. Plug-in adapter inserts: a. Plug-in adapter inserts shall be internally factory connected to the universal edge connector assembly to adapt the universal connector to the specific outlet type configuration (i.e. "RJ" style computer/data, telephone/voice, (multimedia) modular jacks, etc.). b. Inserts shall be certified for shielded or unshielded wire, to match premise wire type connected to the universal edge connector. c. Inserts shall provide correct pin-to-pin connections, electrical and mechanical matching characteristics for the specific equipment connected to the respective outlet. d. Inserts for different infrastructures shall be color coded with different colors from each other, for system identifications. e. Plug-in adapter insert type: 1) Computer/data network systems: a) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B, female modular jack 8-position/contact "RJ- 45" style, Category-6. 2) Telephone/intercom voice systems: a) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568B female modular jack 8-position/contact RJ-45 style, Category Connector housing: a. Connector housing shall contain the universal edge connector assembly and the LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

247 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA plug-in adapter inserts in a rigid assembly. Connector housing shall provide integral cable strain relief for the premise wiring connection. b. The connector housing shall mount to a 4-port or 6-port white faceplate for hard wall locations and in surface-mounted boxes attached to the bottom of the kick plate for work station installations. C. Coaxial Cable Connectors 1. General a. F type connectors, for coaxial cable premise/workstation wiring and coaxial cable patch panel equipment. b. Unless noted otherwise, the BNC connectors shall comply with ANSI/ TIA/EIA- 568D and related Standards, Addendums and TSB. c. Brass body and male contact. Beryllium copper or bronze female contact. Bayonet coupling with threaded or cam-locking mating connection. d. Shall be the product of the same Manufacturer. 2. Operational characteristics shall match or exceed and shall be compatible with the respective coaxial cable. 75-OHM, operational frequency range MHz. 2.4 COPPER WIRE PATCH PANELS A. General 1. Copper wire patch panels shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements, ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568D including related Standards, Amendments and TSB. 2. Shall be the product of Belden with 48-ports, suitable for Belden Category 6 cable. B. Equipment Rack Mounted Patch Panel 1. Standard EIA 19-inches wide metal panel, Manufacturers standard color. Prepunched for copper wire outlet connectors. Panel shall mount on a EIA standard 19-inches wide enclosed or open frame equipment rack assembly. Nominal 24 copper wire outlet connectors in a horizontal row, quantity of rows as required for total quantity of connectors. Provide not less than two spare empty rows for future copper wire outlet connectors. 2. The patch panel shall provide the following self-contained functions. a. Copper wire cable termination including conductor/shield termination and strain relief. b. Plug-in copper wire outlet connectors for port to port patching with copper wire portable patch cords. 3. Patch panel height shall be based on the quantity of copper wire outlet connectors described plus the specified space for future outlets and shall not exceed the following dimension height: Nominal Outlet Quantity Patch Panel Height 48 7 inches LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

248 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 4. Horizontally mounted, cable support metal bracket shall be provided for each 48-outlet/ connector groupings. The brackets shall be bolted to the equipment rack located at the back side of the patch panel; the brackets shall support and provide strain relief for each incoming copper wire cable connecting to the patch panel. 5. The copper wire connector installed in the patch panel shall be the same configuration, Manufacturer and type as the corresponding copper wire connector provided in the remote workstation outlet locations connecting to the respective patch panel outlet, unless indicated otherwise. 2.5 EQUIPMENT RACK A. General 1. A equipment grounding bus, nominal 19 inches long, UL labeled as a ground terminal bus, shall be provided on each equipment rack. The ground bus shall be bolted to the rack main metal frame member with 1-inch standoff non-insulating bolts. Provide a minimum of ten drilled and taped bolt holes in the ground bus with ground lug bolts, for connection of equipment grounding conductors to the ground bus, size to accept ground conductors #14-#4 AWG. 2. Vertically mounted, cable management metal rings (aluminum or stainless steel) shall be provided full height, continuously along the front and rear of each vertical rail of the equipment rack. The rings shall be bolted to the equipment rack. The rings shall train and dress portable patch cords connecting between outlet connectors located in the equipment rack or in adjacent equipment racks. 3. Provide horizontal cable management panels with multiple cable training rings on each panel (not less than 5 rings for each panel). Management panels (for up to 24 outlet grouping) nominal 19 inches wide x 1.75 inches high x 3 inches deep and/or (for up to 48 outlet groupings) 3.5 inch high x 3 inches deep, for EIA rack installation. Rings shall provide horizontal routing and support by grouping portable patch cords connecting between patch ports in the same equipment rack or adjacent racks. Patch cords shall be grouped and bundled with Velcor tie wraps and shall not overlap patch fields or rack mounted equipment. The panels shall be installed on both the front and rear of the equipment racks, mounted both above and below horizontally between groups of patch ports as follows: a. One cable management panel (front and rear of rack) for each group of 48 or less copper wire outlets for patch ports. b. One cable management panel (front and rear of rack) for each group of 48 fiber optic outlet patch ports. 4. The entire rack assembly including any support arms shall comply with Seismic Zone 4 earthquake structural standards. The assembly shall provide support for the weight of the equipment installed on the rack, but in no case less than 500 pounds of equipment, plus the weight of the rack and connecting cables. A 2.0 times safety factor shall be included in the equipment rack assembly structural design. 5. Provide Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor with RF Suppresser (TVSS) and Power Distribution Unit (PDU). 120 volt - 1 phase, 20 ampere 60 Hz AC plug horizontal strip, mounted in each equipment rack. Each unit shall contain not less than eight plug-in on the rear of the TVSS and not less than two plug-in on the front of the TVSS protected outlet plugs. a. Provide two TVSS/PDU units in each equipment rack, to supply dual-corded equipment. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

249 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 6. Provide pre-drilled mounting holes the entire length of equipment vertical mounting frames, EIA-310D-19 inch (nominal) wide standard spacing for indicated equipment. Racks shall provide inches (nominal) equipment horizontal mounting space between vertical rails. 7. Provide all floor standing equipment racks with wall bracket support arms extending from the stationary portion of the rack to adjacent wall. Provide "dual-rail arm" cable runway tray, horizontally from each equipment rack, to the wall directly behind the equipment rack a. The tray shall extend from and bolt to the top of the equipment rack fixed top rail. b. The tray side rail arms shall be a minimum of 6-inches deep, with "ladder" type rungs spanning horizontally between the side rail arms. The rail arms shall be parallel with each other. The rail-to-rail arm spacing shall be the same as the equipment rack width. c. The rungs shall be spaced not more than 6-inches on center between the side rails, along the length of the side rail arms. The rungs shall have a minimum cable bearing surface of not less than 0.75 inches, lengthwise along the tray. d. The runway tray shall support a minimum of 200 pounds per linear foot live conductor/cable loading, with not more than 0.25 inches deflection at mid-span. e. Provide a continuous horizontal support C channel along the wall behind the equipment racks and bolt the dual-rail arm cable runway tray to the channel at the wall. The channel elevation on the wall above the finish floor shall support the runway tray horizontally ( 0.2 inches), from the equipment rack to the wall. f. Equipment racks shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements, ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568B including related Standards, Amendments and TSB. g. The wall mounted horizontal support channel shall be securely through bolt to wall structural member, a minimum of 16 inches on center. The horizontal support channel shall extend a minimum of 6-inches past each side of the runway tray. As manufactured by Unistrut-P1001C Series; or B-Line; or Steel City/Kindorf. h. Equipment racks shall be Manufacturer s standard rust inhibitor primer. Manufacturer s standard color finish paint over primer, unless noted otherwise. B. Fixed Position Floor Standing Open Frame Equipment Racks: 1. Floor mounted self-supporting rack, nominal 78-inches of usable mounting frame height for equipment. 2. Bolted or welded hot dip galvanized steel or gold irradiate finish aluminum support frame. Hardware shall be stainless steel. 3. Open frame rack construction, fixed, non-swing gate. a. Two-post style for equipment racks not designated as containing UPS equipment or server equipment. 4. Open frame equipment racks as manufactured by B-Line; or Saunders; or Hendry. C. Plug Strip Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) and Power Distribution (PDU) Units 1. General a. Self-contained unit combining plug-in TVSS strip and power distribution unit PDU. Rated 20 amp, nominal 120 volt +10%, 60Hz, AC, 2400 watts full continuous load. Internal 20 amp resettable overload protection circuit breaker. Red illuminated on-off switch. Nine foot, 12 AWG 3-conductor grounded, high LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

250 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA abuse heavy duty jacketed AC, line cord with NEMA 5-20P cap. Multi-outlet receptacles, suitable for use with the following types of plug in loads; data processing equipment, audio/video equipment, test instruments, medical equipment, photo graphic equipment and switching type power supplies. b. As manufactured by Libert; or TRIPP LITE. c. Protected outlet shall be NEMA 5-15R 15 amp, or 20 amp NEMA 5-20R AC 60Hz receptacles, as applicable for connected equipment loads. Provide not less than eight protected outlet plugs on each unit. Each individual or group of two receptacles (duplex) shall be connected to separate protected load isolated filter banks. d. Each duplex shall be isolated from the other output receptacles, minimum isolation of 25Db at 1MHz line to line, line to neutral, line to ground and neutral to ground. e. Non-blocking plug-in locations/orientation, for plug-in self-contained powerbrick power supplies. 2. Operation Self-contained RFI and EMF shielded housing with mounting slots for temporary mounting of the unit. Protected outlet receptacles shall supply over current protected and filtered, electrical line voltage power to the connected equipment. Line noise RFI and EMI interference filtering suppression, transient voltage surge and spike protection shall occur in all three modes of operation line to ground, line to neutral and neutral to ground rated as follows: a. 13,000 ampere, 210 joules (watt-seconds) peak withstands capacity. b. Transient response time less than five nano seconds. c. 140 volt AC RMS initiate spikes suppression 330 volt maximum let through. d. RFI and EMI Suppression-Provide spectrum analysis test db attenuation reports showing RFI filtering over specified frequencies. e. Diagnostic indicator lights located on the TVSS housing shall provide alarm alert for each of the following conditions: 1) Loss of AC power. 2) Damage, malfunction in the TVSS suppression circuits. 3) Improper AC electrical outlet wiring. f. Standards Testing, Listing and Certification Compliance: 1) IEEE 587 A and B compliance. 2) UL 1449 transient voltage surge suppressers. 3) UL 1363 temporary power taps. 4) UL 1283 electromagnetic interference filters. 2.6 WORK STATION OUTLETS A. General 1. Label ( P-Touch type ) outlet cover plates with the port number corresponding to the port number at the respective terminal block, patch panel, or head-end equipment. 2. The outlet cover plates shall be factory prepunched and formed to accommodate the installed outlet connector with attachment screws. 3. Workstation outlets shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements, ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568D including related Standards, Amendments and TSB, Category Shall be the product of the same Manufacturer. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

251 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA B. Computer/Data Workstation Copper wire Outlets 1. The outlets shall be the same configuration, same Manufacturer and type as the corresponding connector provided in the copper wire patch panel outlet, unless noted otherwise. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568D, and related Standards, Addendums and TSB. 3. The copper wire outlet connectors for twisted pair wire connections in computer workstation outlets shall be universal outlet connector RJ-45 type. C. Telephone/Voice Handset Twisted Pair Wire Connection Work Station Outlets 1. The copper wire outlet connectors provided in telephone/voice handset outlets shall be universal outlet connector type, unless noted otherwise, ANSI/TIA/EIA 568D and related Standards, Addendums and TSB. a. RJ-45 type 2. The outlets shall be the product of the same Manufacturer as the computer/data workstation outlets. D. Multimedia Audio/Video and TV Workstation Outlets 1. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568D and related Standards, Addendums and TSB. a. F type connectors for coaxial cable b. Shall be the product of the same Manufacturer. E. Outlet Boxes 1. Wall mounted a. Flush or surface and size wall mounted outlet box as indicated on the Drawings, but in no case less than 4.69 inches x 4.69 inches x inches deep. b. Single-gang wide extension ring for outlet box to extend outlet flush with finish surface, or as noted on the Drawings. c. Single-gang wide cover plate, or as noted on the Drawings. 2. Inside flush floor boxes and other locations where indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Multi-outlet Raceway Work Station Outlets 1. Copper wire outlet: a. Where copper wire connection is indicated for the workstation outlet, provide one universal outlet connector for each outlet. b. Each universal outlet connector shall be single connector housing type. c. Provide a rectangular cutout and metal device plate in the raceway sized to Outlet Manufacturer's recommendations. The workstation copper wire outlet shall mount a modular faceplate kit with outlet bezel and faceplate sized to match the workstation outlet. d. Offset the location of outlets for electronic network systems 6 inches in the raceway from other outlets, do not "stack" outlets one above the other in the raceway. 2.7 PORTABLE PATCH CORDS A. General 1. Provide portable patch cords for all copper wire infrastructure outlets: a. For interconnecting electronic network equipment to electronic network workstation outlets. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

252 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA b. For interconnecting equipment rack patch panel outlet patch locations with each other. c. For interconnecting patch panel outlets equipment rack mounted hubs, switches, routers etc. 2. Patch cords shall be factory assembled tested and certified with factory terminated plugs at each end. Field terminated portable patch cords shall not be permitted. Terminated plugs shall incorporate integral bending radius limiting molded boots and strain relief. Patch cord assemblies shall be rated for "heavy duty", high-abuse service. 3. Patch cords shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements. ANSI/EIA/T1A 568B, related Standards, Addendums and TSB. a. NEC and CEC - OFNG/OFN for fiber optic portable patch cords. b. NEC and CEC - MPP/CMP/CMR/CMG/MPG for copper wire twisted pair portable patch cords. c. NEC and CEC - CATV for coaxial cable portable patch cords. 4. Patch cords which are not installed shall be delivered to the OWNER in cardboard boxes. The patch cords shall be neatly bundled and tied together. Mark each box with quantity and type of cords contained in the box. 5. Patch cords shall comply with the same cable communication performance requirements and testing requirements as the respective infrastructure cables and outlets to which the patch cords are intended to be connected (plug-in) shall be a product of the same Manufacturer. 6. The outer jacket of each portable patch cord shall be imprinted with date, Manufacturer s model and catalog number and AHJ listing identification. B. Computer/Data Copper Wire Portable Patch Cords 1. Computer/data patch general: a. "Male" eight positions modular "RJ" male style jacks install on each end of the patch cord cable. The jack shall be provided with a rear "fin" to prevent the plug tab from snagging when pulled backwards through adjacent wiring. b. Patch cord cable shall be UTP to match premise wiring, 4-pair twisted, stranded copper individually insulated wires, thermoplastic jacket over all the wires and shield. c. Connectors shall comply with FCC 68.5 and Part 68 Subpart F. d. Connectors UL listed and shall comply with UL-94V-O. e. Contacts gold plated with not less than a 750 insertion/with drawl cycle rating. 2. Patch cord quantities and lengths - for connection from computer workstations to computer workstation outlets. a. Patch cord quantity: Provide one complete patch cord assembly for each copper wire computer workstation outlet located remote from the equipment rack patch panels. Cable jacket color shall be white. 1) Ethernet network outlet segments the pin-to-pin patch cord wiring configuration and jacks shall be compatible with the network interface card, and computer workstation outlet. b. Provide 10 feet long copper wire patch cables for copper wire computer workstation outlets. The patch cords shall provide internal cross over wiring to conform the pin-to-pin connections required between the computer workstation outlet and the network interface card installed in the respective computer workstation. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

253 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 3. Patch cord quantities and lengths - for connection from equipment rack patch panel ports to network HUB and concentrator equipment ports; between network HUB and network concentrator equipment ports. Cable jacket color shall be white. a. Patch cord quantity: Provide one complete patch cord assembly for each copper wire outlet port located in network HUBS and network concentrator equipment. Provide additional spare patch cords, quantity equal to 15% of the total quantity of HUB and concentrator ports. 1) Ethernet network outlet segments - the pin-to-pin patch cord wiring configuration and jacks shall be compatible with the respective network equipment and patch panel outlets as applicable. b. Provide the following lengths of copper wire patch cables for outlet ports located in network HUBS and network concentrators. The patch cords shall provide quantity of conductors, internal crossover wiring to conform with the pin-to-pin connectors and jack/connectors to the ports in the HUB's concentrators and equipment rack patch panels. 1) 2 feet long - 1/3 of total quantity 2) 3 feet long - 1/3 of total quantity 3) 4 feet long - 1/3 of total quantity C. Coaxial Cable Portable Patch Cords. 1. F type connectors on each end of each patch cord. 2. Patch cord quantity: Provide two complete patch cord assemblies for each coaxial cable outlet. a. One patch cord for workstation outlet located remote from the equipment rack patch panel, 15 feet long each patch cord. b. One patch cord for equipment rack (IDF/MDF) patch panel each outlet location, 10 feet long each patch cord. 2.8 CIRCUIT PROTECTORS A. General 1. The circuit protectors shall be UL listed, complying with National Electrical Code, ETL tested and certified to comply with or exceed specified requirements, ANSI/TIA/EIA- 568D including related Standards, Amendments and TSB. B. Circuit Protectors 1. Cables containing non-dielectric electrical conducting components entering from the exterior of the building shall be provided with individual circuit protectors combining both lightning circuit protection and TVSS circuit protection on each circuit conducting component, as required in NEC and CEC Articles 770 and Install circuit protectors in the respective backboard/equipment rack where copper wire conductors terminate, connect each protector to room/closet ground bus equipment with #10AWG green insulated bond/ground copper conductors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING DATA AND TELEPHONE CABLING LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

254 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA A. All existing data and telephone cabling shall be removed from work station back to communication room where the new cabling is installed. 3.2 NETWORK CABLE TESTING A. General 1. In addition to the testing recommended in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568D and related Standards, Amendments and TSB, test each copper wire conductor, and each connector in all terminated and unterminated cables, portable patch cord, outlet and patch panel provided in the Contract shall be tested after installation splicing and termination is completed. 2. Cable Circuit Type of TEST a. Each patch panel to Attenuation Test and patch panel segment Signature Trace Test b. Each patch panel to Attenuation Test workstation outlet Ring-out Test c. Transmission link performance ANSI/EIA/TIA-T5B67 d. Electronic network equipment port Transmitter Receiver to port and port to work station outlet Level Test 3. e. NEXT test Each End of Each Circuit Provide six copies of all test reports, bound in three ring binders to Owner s Representative. 4. The Contractor shall repair or replace equipment, cables, outlets, connectors, splices, terminations, etc. identified during testing as not complying with the Contract Documents, without additional cost to the Contract. Retest all replaced or repaired components at Contractor's expenses. B. The Test Report shall include the following minimum tests: 1. Data of test. 2. Length 3. Propagation delay. 4. Delay skew. 5. Impedance. 6. Attenuation. 7. Tester Manufacturer, model, serial number, hardware and software versions. 8. Insertion loss. 9. Pair-to-Pair Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) 10. Power Sum Near Crosstalk (PSNEXT) 11. Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (ELFEXT). 12. Power Sum Equal Level Far End Crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 13. Return Loss. 14. Shield continuity. 15. The most up-to-date requirements as promulgated. 16. Db loss LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

255 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA C. Note that a PASS test is considered 100% passing all testing requirements and a FAIL test is considered anything less than 100%. City reserves the right to observe any part of the cabling process, including testing of cabling. D. Note that the Testing must ultimately pass to the satisfaction of all pending warranty requirements. 3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION A. General 1. Cables connecting to equipment racks and terminal blocks shall be installed with not less than 6-feet of slack cable between the equipment rack/terminal block and terminal backboard. The slack cable shall be coiled and supported on the backboard and/or cable tray. 2. Cables in terminal closets and terminal rooms shall be trained, dressed and racked on the plywood backboards. Provide cable, metal support arms and re-enterable type cable support rings not less than 12 inches on center mounted onto the plywood along the entire length of all cables. 3. Provide separate routing paths on plywood backboards for fiber optic cables, computer data and copper wire cables and telephone/voice copper wire cables and multimedia, audio/video, TV cables. Provide separate routing paths on plywood backboards for shielded copper wire cables and unshielded copper wire cables. 4. Cables shall be routed parallel to floors and walls. Do not route cables diagonally on backboards. 5. Spare cable slack a. Provide 25 feet of cable slack where unterminated cables are specified at terminal backboards. b. Provide a minimum of 18 inches of slack cable in each workstation outlet box and outlet locations. c. Provide 10 feet of cable slack in ceiling above each work station outlet. d. Provide 24 inches of slack in each cable at patch panel locations. e. Coil and "tye" wrap slack cable. 6. Provide horizontal wiring cables installed from individual computer/ data workstation outlets to respective terminal closet/room patch panel. Cables shall be continuous without cutting or splices. 7. Provide horizontal wiring cables installed from individual workstation telephone/voice handset outlets to respective terminal closet/room terminal patch panels. Cables shall be continuous without cutting or splices. 8. Provide horizontal wiring cables installed from individual multimedia, audio/ video, TV outlets to respective terminal closet/room patch panels. Cables shall be continuous without cutting or splices. 9. Provide cables installed between MDF/IDF terminal rooms/closets patch panels. Cables shall be continuous without cutting or splices. B. Cable Pulling Lubrication 1. Cable pulling lubricants shall be specifically approved by the cable Manufacturer. The following lubricants shall be used where approved by the Cable Manufacturer. a. Slip X -300, American Colliod Co. b. Bishop #45, Bishop Electric. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

256 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. MacLube CA51, MacProducts. d. Minerallac H2B,- Minerallac Electric. e. Winter grade #7437-PC, General Machine Products. f. Gel-lube 7/5, Cable associates. g. Polywater, A, C, G - American Polywater. 2. Lubricants shall be continuously applied as cable enters raceway. C. Cable Installation: 1. Do not pull conductors until factory test reports have been submitted and reviewed. 2. The minimum bending radius for copper wire cables shall be 10 times the cable outside diameter. The maximum pulling tension and minimum bending radius shall not violate Manufacturer's recommendations. 3. The attachment of pulling devices directly to the cables shall be with individual split mesh basket grips. Direct connection for pulling cables to cable fibers and copper wires shall not occur. Securely tape cable ends to prevent moisture or pulling compound from penetrating cable. 4. The attachment of the pulling device to the cable basket grips shall be made through a swivel connector. 5. The Contractor shall ensure that the cables are fed straight into the raceway taking care to avoid short bends, sharp edges and cable "cross-overs". 6. All lashings used for temporary bunching of the individual cables shall be removed before the cables enter the raceway. 7. For each cable pull where a cable direction change is required, flexible feed-in tubes, pullout devices, multi-segmented sheaves etc. shall be used to insure proper cable pulling tensions and side wall pressures. Cables shall not be pulled directly around a short right angle bend. Any device or surface the cable comes in contact with when under pull-in tension shall have a minimum radius 50% greater than the final specified minimum installed cable bending radius. The maximum possible size radius sheaves and feed-in tubes, usable in the available working space, shall be provided in all situations, to insure the minimum possible cable sidewall pulling pressure. Do not use devices with multisegment "roller" type sheaves. 8. Cable lengths over 50 feet shall be machine pulled not hand pulled into and through all raceways. Cables shall be pulled in a continuous, smooth operation without jerking or stop-start motion after initiation of pull. Maximum cable pulling speed shall be less than 50 feet per minute. Minimum cable pulling speed shall be greater than 15 feet per minute. 9. Cables shall be pulled straight into or out of the raceway without bends at the raceway entrance or exit. Pull in cable from the end having the sharpest bend (i.e., bend shall be closest to reel). Keep pulling tension to minimum by liberal use of lubricant, hand turning of reel, and slack feeding of cable into duct entrance. Employ not less than one man at reel and one at manhole or pullhole during this operation. Cables shall be pulled directly from cable reels. 10. Where cable tray is provided, all cables shall be routed and trained on the cable tray. The cables shall enter the cable tray and route along the tray prior to entering any equipment racks or computer works station outlets. 11. A dynamometer to measure pulling tension shall be used on all cable runs in excess 200 feet or with more than 180 degrees in bends. The actual pulling tension value shall be calculated and recorded for each pull. 12. Bends shall not be made in cable splices or terminations. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

257 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 13. The portions of cables installed without raceways or cable tray supports shall be installed with metal J-hook cable supports. a. The J-hooks shall provide multi-tiered J shaped hooks, with wide flat cable support base (0.5 inch wide minimum) and smooth rounded corners. Specifically designed for copper wire and fiber optic infrastructure cable support. As manufactured by Erico Inc. b. The individual J-hook attachment to the building structure shall be metal, beam clamp, hanger rod, clevis hanger styles as applicable for each attachment location. c. Install J-hooks not more than 48 inches on center along the entire cable length and within 6 inches of each cable change in direction. Locations of J-Hooks and tension of cables shall insure between 4-inches and 6 inches of cable sag between adjacent hooks. Secure cables to J-hooks with re-enterable cable tie wraps. Jhook supported cables, bundle cables together with re-enterable tie wraps not less than 12 inches on center along the entire cable length. d. Each J-hook shall not support more than 12 individual cables. Provide multiple tiered J-hooks for additional cable quantities at each location. e. Bridle rings shall NOT be used to support cables. f. Cables shall not lie directly on nor attach to ceilings, ceiling hangers, lighting fixtures, air ducts, piping, or equipment. 14. Re-enterable cable tie wraps shall be, limited-combustible and air plenum rated, reusable, color coded. Chemically and mechanically compatible with the respective cables and install locations. Shall allow multiple open-close operations for securing cables. 15. Electronic network cables containing non-dielectric components shall be installed with a minimum separation from other electrical power conductors and equipment as follows: Equipment Type Minimum Separation a. Lighting fixtures 12 inches b. Electric motors, electric solenoids, electric Heaters 40 inches c. Transformers 48 inches d. Circuits over 100 volts to ground, in metallic raceways 5 inches e. Circuits over 100 volts to ground, in non-metallic raceway or without any raceway 12 inches f. Circuits over 100 volts to ground, suspended on overhead pole lines 48 inches D. Movement, Storage, and Handling of Cable: 1. Reels of cable shall not be dropped from any height, from trucks or other transporting equipment. 2. Lift and move cable reels using following methods: a. Crane or boom type equipment-insert shaft (heavy rod or pipe) through reel hubs and lift with slings on shaft, with spreader or yoke to reduce or avoid sling pressure against reel head. b. Fork lift type of equipment may be used to move smaller, narrower width reels. Fork times should be placed so that lift pressure is on reel heads, not on cable, and shall reach all the way across reels so lift is against both reel heads. c. Reels may be moved short distances by rolling. Reels shall be rolled in the direction indicated by arrows painted on reel heads. Surfaces over which the reels are to be rolled shall be solid clear of debris, and also clear of protruding stones, LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

258 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA humps, etc. which might damage the cable if the reel straddles them. 3. Storage of reels of cable: a. Cable ends shall be sealed prior to shipment to prevent moisture entry into cable. Cable ends shall remain sealed at all times including during installation. Where ends seals are removed, reseal cable ends by stripping cable finishes back 2-inches down to insulation. Then apply four layers of an insulating tape criss-cross over the cable end and carry back at least 4-inches onto cable outer finish. Add a containing cover of two layers of vinyl electrical tape completely over the end seal. b. Cable reels shall be shipped with factory applied lagging (protective cover) left in place until removal is absolutely necessary. Additional covering such as tarpaulin, plastic sheeting, etc. shall be used if cable is to be stored outdoors. c. Store reels of cable on a firm surface, paved, or on planking to prevent settling into soft ground. d. Use fencing or other barriers to protect cables and reels against damage by vehicles or other equipment moving about in the storage area. 3.4 CABLE SPLICES A. General 1. Splices only where absolutely necessary and upon written approval from City. Splice(s) in cables shall occur only in the following locations: a. Terminal backboard, closets or rooms. b. Equipment racks. c. Wall mounted interface cabinet. d. Do not splice cables in conduit, cable tray, raceways or plenums. 2. Polarity and color coding shall be maintained consistent through splices, terminations and outlets for the entire electronic network system. 3. Cable splices in outdoor areas, manholes, pullholes shall be water tight, inside universal splice enclosures. B. Copper Wire Splice 1. Copper wire extending from infrastructure workstation outlets to respective equipment rack patch panel outlets shall not be cut or broken and shall be continuous end to end. 2. Copper wire extending from telephone/voice workstation outlets to respective terminal blocks shall not be cut or broken and shall be continuous end to end. 3. Continuity of cable shields (where occurs), polarity and color coding shall be maintained across all splices. 4. Copper wire splices shall be performed to maintain the data transmission rates specified for the entire respective system. 3.5 CABLE TERMINATIONS A. General 1. Infrastructure workstation outlets connecting to ports in patch panels and terminal blocks shall be grouped together in the patch panel and terminal block] by outlet function, room location and building area location (i.e. Group #1 Room #120 1 st floor; Group #2 Room 200 east wing, etc.). Each group shall be identified with engraved (etched) nameplates indicating grouping identification and individual port numbers. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

259 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2. Polarity and color coding of cable connections at splices, terminations and outlets shall be consistently maintained throughout the entire electronic network system. 3. Terminate all cables onto respective outlets connectors, interconnection couplers and terminals. Terminations shall comply with Manufacturer's recommendations; ANSI/TIA/ EIA-568D related Standards, Amendments and TSB. 4. Copper wire cable conductors terminated at outlet locations shall be connected with a strain relief device attached to the cable jacket to prevent cable tension from being transmitted to the termination connectors. B. Copper Wire Terminations 1. Where occurs, the shield on metal shielded copper wire shall be terminated and connected to the shield grounding connection at each termination point. 2. Twisted wire pairs shall not be untwisted for a length of more than 0.4 inches at any location and the cable jacket shall not be striped back not more than 0.5 inches any location including splices and terminations. 3. Unless specifically directed otherwise by the Owner's Representative, Pin assignment for wiring terminations shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568D as required for compatibility with the electronic network equipment. The termination type shall be consistent throughout the Project Contract area. 4. Copper wire termination's shall be performed to maintain the transmission rates specified for the respective entire system. 3.6 EQUIPMENT RACKS A. General 1. Install, assemble, mount and connect devices and equipment in the respective equipment racks, bolted securely to the rack frame with stainless steel hardware. "Star" style lock washers shall be provided to insure an electrically continuous ground path between the equipment/devices and rack frames. 2. Provide blank metal filler panels to close unused equipment "front" mounting space in equipment racks, Manufacturer's standard finish color. 3. Provide a copper wire outlet connector in the respective equipment rack for each remote copper wire infrastructure workstation outlet and copper wire cable shown connected to the respective equipment rack, plus the spare copper wire outlet connectors required in the Contract Documents. The copper wire outlet connectors in the equipment racks shall be provided in equipment rack mounted copper wire patch panels. In no case shall the quantity of equipment rack mounted copper wire outlet connectors be less than the quantity of cables indicated on the Drawings, plus required spaces/ spares. 4. The maximum quantity of cable terminations, in each equipment rack mounted patch panels shall not exceed the following: a. 100% copper wire outlet connectors, 196 maximum per rack. b. Combination of copper wire outlet connectors and fiber optic fiber terminations in the same rack; 48 maximum fiber optic fibers plus 144 maximum copper wire outlet connectors per rack. c. In addition to the quantity of patch panel outlets for termination of incoming and outgoing cables, provide not less than an additional 15% of patch panel spare outlets in each equipment rack for future use. Provide additional equipment racks, quantity of racks to ensure the maximum specified quantity of terminations in single rack are not exceeded and the quantity LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

260 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA of cable terminations complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 5. Terminal racks, equipment locations, patch panels, and cross connects shall be arranged to allow for natural cabling progression, minimize crossing of cables and allow easy access to each system component. 6. Equipment Rack Anchorage: a. Equipment racks installed on raised "access floor" systems, shall be supported and anchored with bolts that extend into the "structural" floor located below the "access floor". b. Securely anchor the support arms of swing gate racks to the wall structural support system. c. Securely anchor fixed support base of the racks to the floor. d. Mounting method shall support the total rack weight including installed equipment, but in no case less than 500 pounds with a 2.0 times safety factor. e. Attachments and anchorages shall comply with the requirements for Earthquake Seismic Zone Install ground bus, TVSS, cable management rings, equipment, patch panel and patch panel outlets, etc. in equipment racks. B. Floor Standing Equipment Racks 1. General: a. Securely anchor racks to floor. b. All incoming cables shall enter through the top or bottom of the racks. c. The front of the racks shall maintain a minimum of 42-inches of clear working space. d. Multiple floor standing racks shall be installed directly adjacent to each other (i.e. side by side), with not less than 6-inches (edge-to-edge) space between adjacent racks. 2. Floor standing open (non-swing gate) equipment racks. a. The rear of the rack shall maintain a minimum of 54-inches clear working space behind the rack frame rails for adequate installation depth of HUBS/switches equipment, for "walk" behind access to equipment and for cable terminations access. b. Provide a minimum spacing between (edge-to-edge) racks of not less than 6- inches. 3.7 TERMINAL ROOMS AND CLOSETS A. Terminal Backboard 1. A ¾-inch thick marine "A-C" grade plywood backboard shall fully cover each wall of terminal closets and terminal rooms. Provide backboard on the wall for equipment racks, incoming cable raceways and terminal blocks. Plywood shall extend from the finish floor to 8 feet above the finish floor. "A" side of plywood shall be exposed. 2. Attach plywood to wall structural framing with mechanical fasteners a minimum 6 inches on center vertically on walls at each framing vertical member, and along the length of the wall, but not less than 16 inches on center horizontally along the length of the wall. 3. Paint plywood terminal backboards after installation and prior to mounting any equipment. One coat of wood paint fire resistant primer and two coats of Class-A fire resistant/intumescent, non-conductive finish coats of paint. Finish flat/matt acrylic enamel fire resistant/retardant latex paint. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

261 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA B. Cable Tray 1. Where one or more equipment racks are installed in the same room/closet. a. Provide a horizontal cable tray above the equipment racks in each circuit terminal room and closet. b. Provide a horizontal cable tray continuous loop around the perimeter inside each MDF and IDF room, within 12-inches of the ceiling. Parallel with and adjacent to all walls in the room. 2. Ladder type cable tray 18 inches wide x 6 inches deep; length-end wall to end wall, of the closet or room. 3. Install the cable tray centered above all equipment racks and around the room perimeter at ceiling/walls with ceiling and wall suspension system. Install trays not more than 36 inches above and not less than 12 inches above the top of the equipment racks. 4. Where multiple segments of cable trays occur in terminal closets and rooms, provide interconnecting cable trays between each segment located in the respective room/closet. C. Conductor Training and Support 1. Provide conductor/cable training and racking support distribution rings installed on backboards. As manufactured by Newton 3042 Series, Saunders or equal. 2. Support rings shall be spaced a minimum of 10 inches on center along all cable/conductor routing paths on backboards and within 4 inches of each change in cable/conductor direction. 3. The capacity of support rings shall be equal to the weight and quantity of conductors/ cables passing through the respective support ring plus 100% spare capacity for installation future conductors/cables. In no case shall support rings be smaller than 3 inches. 4. Attach support rings to backboards with not less than two 3/8-inch diameter x 1⅛-inch long threaded wood anchor bolts for each individual bracket. D. Environment Space Monitoring (MDF and IDF) 1. In each room/closet provide one automatic environmental monitor. Self-calibrating, simultaneous monitoring and software programmable, with alarm set points, shall measure and monitor ambient conditions and provide data-logging for conditions in the space for the following: a. One ambient temperature port and plug-in indoor sensor. b. One ambient humidity port and plug-in indoor sensor. c. One spare plug-in port for an external digital sensor. 2. Digital Fast Ethernet LAN RJ-45 communications port, with alarm alerting and communications software for remote monitoring of the ambient conditions via the LAN. Multi-user site wide software license, compatible with PC-computer and IP-WEB HTTP remote operations. 3. Local internal audio and visual alert annunciators, with local silence and reset volt, 60Hz AC input power supply operation. Equipment rack mount self-contained unit housing configuration. Provide all interconnect cabling and connectors. 5. Provide the environmental unit in one of the equipment racks located in each of the respective spaces. 6. As manufactured by Avtech-Room Alert; or SensaTronic-Environmental Systems; or IT Watch Dog-Climate Monitors. LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

262 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 3.8 IDENTIFICATION (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. General 1. Copper wire cables shall be identified in each manhole, pull box, equipment rack, patch panel and computer workstation outlets. 2. Infrastructure documentation, identification labels and color coding shall comply with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A Administration Standard for Telecommunications Infrastructures, Class-1 thru Class-4. Provide management software MS-Windows-based single user license, with all as-built data entry documentation information complete. 3. Adhere to existing labeling scheme, or if none, develop a labeling scheme, with unique identifiers for each cable in the system, in coordination with the Information Systems Manager (ISM) or designee, clearly identifying all components of the system including without limitation: the faceplates, patch panels, blocks, and cables according to the corresponding jack number and labeling scheme. B. Identification Tags shall include the following information: 1. Cable name as indicated on Drawings (i.e., HV1, F4, MSB3 etc.). 2. Installation month and date (i.e., 3/92, 4/78 etc.). 3. Conductor size conductor type (i.e., loose tube fiber; (#24 AWG ScTP Category 5, 200- pair, telephone/voice etc.). 4. Feeder taps to equipment or building shall also be identified with equipment name or building (i.e. library, SW1, Rack #21, etc.) C. Identification Tags 1. Tags shall be ⅛-inch thick 98% lead, approximately 2-inches square with chamfered corners. Two holes shall be drilled for attachment to primary cable. Lettering shall be ⅛-inch high, engraved or die stamped. Attach tags to primary cables with two #14 AWG (THWN insulated) solid copper conductors "twist-tied", with insulated CAP wire-nut on the tie-wire ends, to cover sharp edges of tie-wire conductor. 2. Alternate identification tags, at the Contractor's option in lieu of lead tags. Provide polypropylene tag holders with interchangeable, yellow polypropylene tag with black alphanumeric characters sets. Characters shall be approximately.25-inch high. As manufactured by Almetek industries "EZTAG" - Ledgewood, New Jersey. D. Equipment and Outlet Naming Identification and Color Coding shall comply with ANSI/EIA/ TIA latest revision. 3.9 SAFETY: A. General: 1. Note that it is the contractor s responsibility to be fully self-informed regarding all legal and industry standard requirements regarding all applicable safety requirements enforce at the time of work being done. 2. Exercise all necessary and reasonable precautions regarding safety of persons and property in performance of the contract requirements and while on site. B. Firestops: 1. Prior to installing the firestop, and in coordination with the ISM, develop a drawing of all proposed firestops, clearly identifying all components that would breach the firestop. 2. Ensure that the appropriate firestop system is installed according to the manufacturer s specifications and all legal requirements. 3. Seal all partial or complete penetrations through any fire-rated building structures LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

263 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA including walls, floors, and ceilings with an appropriate firestop system. 4. Ensure that all penetrating items including without limitation: riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. are properly firestopped. 5. The fire-stopping shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code, and all Federal, State, and local codes. In the event of conflict, the more stringent fire-stopping requirement shall prevail. 6. Remedy, at contractor s sole expense, any defective installed firestop systems to the satisfaction of the City s inspector. END OF SECTION / LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS INFRASTRUCTURE

264 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION CONDUIT AND WIRE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment, facilities, transportation and services necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other Sections and required to be included as work under this Section. 2. General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. Submit product data sheets for all wire, supports, conduit, fittings and splicing materials. B. Submit material list for all conduit and conduit fittings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT A. General 1. The interior surfaces of conduits and fittings shall be continuous and smooth, with a constant interior diameter. Conduits and conduit fittings shall provide conductor raceways of fully enclosed circular cross section. The interior surfaces of conduits and fittings shall be without ridges, burrs irregularities or obstructions. Conduits and fittings of the same type shall be of the same uniform weight and thickness. 2. Type of conduit, type of conduit fittings and conduit supports shall be suitable for the conditions of use and the conditions of location of installation, based on the Manufacturer s recommendations and based on applicable codes. 3. All fittings for metal conduit shall be suitable for use as a grounding means, pursuant to the applicable Code requirements. All metal conduit and metal conduit fittings shall provide 3 second duration ground fault current carrying ratings, when installed and connected to the respective conduit, as follows: a. RMC and EMT conduit fittings. 1) 0.5 inch through 1.5 inch conduit/fitting size - 10,000 ampere RMS. 2) 2.0 inch and larger conduit/fitting size - 20,000 ampere RMS. b. FMC and LTFMC Conduit Fittings 1) 0.5 inch through 1.25 inch conduit/fitting size-1,000 ampere RMS (without external bonding jumper). 2) 1.5 inch through 4.0 inch fitting size-10,000 ampere RMS with bonding jumper. CONDUIT AND WIRE

265 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 4. Protective corrosion resistant finish for metal conduit fabricated from steel and metal conduit fittings fabricated from steel, shall be as follows: a. Clean all metal surfaces (including metal threads) with acid bath pickle prior to coating, to remove dirt, oil and prepare surfaces for galvanizing. b. Hot-dip galvanized zinc coating on all interior and exterior steel surfaces. Minimum finish zinc coating thickness shall not be less than inches. c. Threads shall be hot-dip zinc coated after machine fabrication. d. Exterior metal surfaces shall be finished with clear organic polymer topcoat layer, after galvanizing. e. The inner metal surfaces of conduit fittings shall be finished with a lubricating topcoat after galvanizing, to facilitate conductor pulling through the conduit/fitting. 5. Threads for metal conduit and metal conduit fittings shall be taper-pipe-thread, National Pipe Standards (NPS) and shall comply with ANSI-B Metal conduit termination connector fittings shall be provided with a Manufacturer installed, insulating throat bushing inside the fitting. The bushing shall protect the wire conductor insulation from cutting, nicks and abrasion during conductor installation and electrical load cycling after installation is complete. The bushing shall comply with UL 94V-0 flammability. 7. Provide conduit bonding/grounding jumper from metal enclosures with concentric ring knockouts, to positively ground/bond each respective conduit(s) to the metal enclosure. 8. Metal conduit fittings connecting to PVC coated metal conduit shall be PVC coated to match the conduit. 9. The conduit and fittings shall be watertight and airtight without cracks and pinholes. B. Rigid metal Conduit (RMC) 1. Rigid metal, round tubing, machine threaded at both ends. a. The conduit and conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements for a equipment grounding conductor, pursuant to applicable codes. 2. RMC raceway types shall be as follows: a. Rigid galvanized steel conduit (RGS), minimum yield strength shall be 35,000 PSI. Shall comply with NEMA standard 5-19 (latest revision); ANSI C80.1 and ANSI-C80.4 (latest revision); U.L. 514-B and UL 6 (latest revisions); National Pipe Standard Specification (latest revision). b. Intermediate steel conduit (IMC). Shall comply with NEMA Standard 5-19 (latest revision) ANSI-C80.6 (latest revision); UL 2142 (latest revision). 3. RMC fittings: a. Fittings shall be compatible with RGS and IMC. b. Fittings shall be rated liquid tight. c. Fittings imbedded in concrete shall be rated liquid tight and concrete tight. d. Connectors and couplings for terminating, connecting and coupling to RMC conduit shall be threaded metal. e. Fittings shall comply with ANSI C80.4 and ANSI C33-84 (latest revision); NEMA FB1 (latest revision); UL 514 (latest revision). 4. RMC fittings as manufactured by: a. For threaded enclosure, termination connection. 1) Thomas & Betts Series bonding locknut, 5302 Series sealing ring with stainless steel retainer. b. For non-threaded enclosure, termination connector. 1) Thomas & Betts Series watertight threaded sealing hub, 106 series threaded bonding lock nut, Sta-Con Series enclosure bonding jumper and 3870 Series threaded ground bushing. CONDUIT AND WIRE

266 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2) OZ/Gedney-CHMT/CHT watertight threaded hub with bonding locknut and GH50G Series enclosure bonding jumper. c. For RMC to RMC conduit-to-conduit coupling 1) Erickson (threaded) Series 2) OZ/Gedney Type 4 (threaded) Series 3) Threaded RMC conduit couplings, product of the same Manufacturer as the RMC conduit. d. For RMC Conduit Seals 1) OZ/Gedney-EYA and EYAM (threaded) Series 2) Appleton-EYF and EYM (threaded) Series C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 1. Rigid metal round tubing, thin wall steel construction, with non-threaded ends. a. The conduit and conduit fittings shall comply with the requirements for a equipment grounding conductor pursuant to applicable codes. b. The conduit shall be watertight and airtight without cracks and pinholes. 2. EMT shall be allowed for conduit size ranges from 0.5 inch through 4.0 inch. 3. Comply with ANSI C80.3, C80.4, and ANSI C33.98 (latest revisions); UL 594 and UL 797 (latest revisions); CEC Section (latest revision). 4. EMT fittings: a. Connectors and couplings for terminating, connecting and coupling to EMT conduit shall be non-threaded steel fabrication. b. EMT termination connector fittings shall be as follows: 1) Set screw type concrete tight when installed in dry interior locations. 2) Compression types raintight and concrete tight when installed in wet or damp locations, outdoors and in concrete or masonry construction. c. Fittings shall comply with ANSI C33.84 (latest revision); UL 514 (latest revision); NEMA FB EMT fittings as manufactured by: a. For threaded and non threaded enclosure, termination connector 1) Thomas & Betts-TC5031 (set screw type) Series (with locknuts). 2) OZ/Gedney-4000ST (set screw type) Series. 3) Thomas & Betts-5123 (compression type) Series (with 2 locknuts). 4) OZ/Gedney-7000ST (compression type) Series (with locknut). 5) Thomas & Betts-4240 (compression type) Series (90 degree angle with locknut). 6) OZ/Gedney-8000WT (compression type) Series (90 degree angle with locknut). b. For EMT to EMT conduit-to-conduit coupling: 1) Thomas & Betts-TK121 (set screw type) Series (with locknut). 2) OZ/Gedney-5000 (set screw type) Series (with locknut). 3) Thomas & Betts-5120 (compression type) Series. 4) OZ/Gedney-6000S (compression type) Series. c. For EMT to RMC conduit to conduit combination coupling: 1) Thomas & Betts-HT221 (set screw type) Series. 2) OZ/Gedney-ESR (set screw type) Series. 3) Thomas & Betts-530 (compression type) Series. 4) OZ/Gedney-ETR (compression type) Series. CONDUIT AND WIRE

267 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA D. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) 1. Round flexible conduit, fabricated from a single continuous steel strip. The steel shall be factory formed into continuous interlocking convolutions to form a complete lock between steel strips and provide raceway flexibility. 2. Metal to metal grounding contact shall be maintained throughout the length of the FMC conduit. 3. FMC shall be allowed for conduit size ranges from 0.5 inch through 4.0 inch. 4. FMC shall comply with ANSI-C and ANSI C33.92; NEMA FB-1; CEC FMC Fittings a. FMC fittings shall be malleable iron construction or steel construction. b. Fitting shall automatically cause the FMC raceway throat opening to be centered with respect to the fitting throat opening. c. Straight and angled connector termination fittings shall be threaded on one end and shall include a threaded locknut, suitable for connection to threaded and unthreaded enclosures. d. The attachment of the fittings to FMC shall be angled saddle type, to engage and interlock with the FMC spiral groove, and shall be unaffected by vibration. Direct bearing screw type fittings shall not be used. e. Direct FMC conduit-to-fmc conduit coupling of FMC shall not be permitted. f. Shall comply with ANSI C33.9, and ANSI C33.92 (latest revision); NEMA FB1 (latest revision); U.L FMC fittings as manufactured by: a. Straight Termination Connectors 45 & 90 Degree Angle Connectors 1) Thomas & Betts Series Thomas & Betts-3130 Series (with locknut) (with locknut) b. FMC to EMT conduit combination coupling: 1) Thomas & Betts 503TB Series. E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LTFMC) 1. The metal conduit core of LTFMC shall comply with the same requirements as FMC conduit, with the addition of a thermoplastic exterior flexible jacket over the metal core. 2. The exterior jacket shall be positively locked to the metal core to prevent jacket sleeving. 3. The LTFMC shall be rated for installation and operating service temperatures of between 0 degrees centigrade through plus 90 degrees centigrade. 4. The LTFMC jacket shall be suitable for continuous exposure to sunlight, rainwater, water vapor, mineral oils and liquid solvents, without penetrating into the conduit and without deteriorating the jacket. 5. LTFMC sizes from 0.5 inch through 1.25 inches shall include an additional internal ground conductor, fabricated by the Manufacturer, as an integral part of the conduit core. 6. Direct LTFMC conduit-to-ltfmc conduit coupling of LTFMC shall not be permitted. 7. LTFMC shall be allowed for conduit size ranges from 0.5 inch through 4.0 inches. 8. In addition to the requirements for FMC conduit, LTFMC shall also comply with ANSI C (latest revision); NEMA-FB1 (latest revision); CEC (latest revision). 9. LTFMC fittings a. Fittings shall include an external mechanical ground/bond wire connector. b. The attachment of the fitting to LTFMC shall be threaded compression type onto the conduit core with locknut and liquid tight jacket compression seal. The fitting shall automatically prevent sleeving of the jacket. CONDUIT AND WIRE

268 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. Straight and angled termination connector fittings shall be threaded on one end and shall include locknut suitable for connection to threaded and unthreaded enclosures. 10. LTFMC fittings as manufactured by: a. Termination connector fittings: Straight 45 and 90 Degree Angle Connectors 1) Thomas & Betts-5331 GR Series. Thomas&Betts-5341GR&5351GR Series. 2) Appleton-STB Series; STN-L Series Appleton-STB-L Series; STN-L for use performed with Series for use performed with knockouts. knockouts. 3) OZ/Gedney-4QLT Series. OZ/Gedney-4QLT Series b. LTFMC to RMC conduit to conduit combination coupling fittings: 1) Thomas & Betts-5271 GR Series. 2) OZ/Gedney-4QFML Series G. Expansion Joint, Deflection Joint and Seismic Joint Conduit Fittings 1. Expansion Conduit Fitting - Fitting shall provide for a minimum of two (2) inches straight line movement between two connecting conduits in each direction (total four (4) inches conduit expansion and contraction) parallel to the respective conduit lengths. Fitting shall be watertight. 2. Deflection Conduit Fitting - Fitting shall provide for a minimum of 30 degrees angular deflection movement ( Shear deflection) between two connecting conduits, in any direction perpendicular to the length of the respective conduits. Fitting shall be watertight. 3. Combination Expansion/Deflection Conduit Fitting - Fitting shall provide the combined expansion and deflection movement capacity between two connecting conduits as described for separate expansion and deflection conduit fittings. Fitting shall be approved for installation concealed in both masonry/concrete construction and exposed non-masonry/ concrete construction. Fitting shall be watertight. 4. Fittings shall comply with U.L. 5. Fittings as manufactured by: a. Conduit expansion fittings exposed or concealed locations as manufactured by: 1) OZ/Gedney - AX8 Series for RMC conduit. 2) OZ/Gedney - TX Series for EMT conduit. 3) Appleton - XJ8 Series for RMC conduit and EMT conduits. Provide RMC to EMT combination conduit coupling fittings for each end of the expansion fitting. b. Combination expansion/deflection conduit fittings exposed or concealed conduit locations as manufactured by: 1) OZ/Gedney - AXDX Series for RMC conduit. 2) OZ/Gedney - AXDX Series for EMT conduit. Provide RMC to EMT combination conduit coupling fittings for each end of the expansion/ deflection fitting. c. Conduit expansion/deflection fittings for FMC and LTFMC conduit. 1) Provide a minimum of 12 inches of slack LTFMC in each FMC or LTFMC conduit at building and structure seismic or expansion joint conduit crossings. 2) Note: Each FMC slack expansion/deflection location, shall be considered as not less than a 90 degree conduit bend location, for compliance with the maximum quantity of conduit bends allowed in a raceway. CONDUIT AND WIRE

269 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 6. Conduit fitting bonding jumper: a. The grounding/bonding path of metal conduit shall be maintained by the fitting. b. Provide a bonding jumper at each expansion, deflection and combination expansion deflection conduit fitting. c. The jumper shall be a bare flexible copper braid. The copper braid electrical current carrying capacity shall be equal to the metal conduit. d. Provide a factory terminated ground clamp on each end of the braid with adjusting steel conduit grounding clamps and connect to each respective conduit end. e. The jumper braid length shall be 8-inches longer than the respective conduit fitting. f. Bonding jumper for FMC and EMT fittings as manufactured by: 1) OZ/Gedney - BJ Series 2) Appleton - XJB Series H. Conduit Bodies Conduit Fitting 1. Conduit bodies shall provide conductor access with a removable conduit body cover and wiring area enclosed in metal housing. The conduit body shall facilitate pulling conductors. 2. In-line form C conduit bodies shall be prohibited. 3. The interior space length of 90 degree elbow conduit bodies shall not be less than 6 times the diameter size of the largest conduit connecting to the conduit body. 4. Conduit body covers shall be removable, gasketed; watertight domed metal covers with threaded screw attachment to the conduit body. 5. Lubricated, reusable, wire roller guards inside the conduit body shall protect wire from insulation damage during wire pulling. 6. Conduit body fittings shall comply with UL Conduit bodies as manufactured by: a. For RMC Conduit OZ/Gedney - LB 6X/Mogul (90 degree elbow) Series - threaded body. Appleton - LB/Mogul (90 degree elbow) Series - threaded body. b. For EMT Conduit 1) Same as for RMC conduit. Provide EMT to RMC conduit combination coupling fitting for each outlet body connection. 2.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. General 1. Conduit Supports, hangers and fasteners for metal conduit shall be steel, hot dip zinc galvanized. 2. Threaded hardware shall be continuous, free running threads. 3. Conduit support systems, including support channels, pipe clamps, braces, anchors, hardware, fasteners, shall be sized to support the full capacity circuit conductors weight, plus the installed conduit weight, plus the conduit fitting weight and support hardware weight, plus a 300% additional weight capacity safety factor. 4. Provide lock washer at each bolted /threaded connection. 5. Conduit supports, fasteners, channels, braces, hardware, anchors, pipe clamps and hangers as manufactured by Unistrut or Kindorf. 6. Supports shall be free of BURRS and sharp edges. 7. Metal supports cut in the field shall be zinc galvanized after cutting to prevent rust. CONDUIT AND WIRE

270 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA B. Conduit Hangers 1. Threaded steel hanger rods. a. Hanger rods smaller than inches in diameter shall not be used for support of individual conduits. b. Hanger rods smaller than 0.5 inches in diameter shall not be used for support of multiple conduits. 2. Conduit hanger wires shall be not less than 12 gauge steel. 3. Conduit hangers shall attach to structure fasteners with steel Clevis or Swing hangers and shall provide a minimum of 45 degrees of angular movement in any direction at the point of the conduit hanger attachment to the structure fasteners. 4. Conduits individually suspended by conduit hangers shall fasten to the respective hangers with Clevis type pipe hangers. The pipe hangers shall be steel, adjustable to fit conduit size and shall completely enclose the conduit circumference. C. Conduit Support Channels 1. C channels shall be factory preformed with a minimum 12 gauge thickness metal. The channel shall be factory punched with regularly spaced slotted holes for fastener attachments along the length of the channel. 2. The C channel shall not deflect more than 0.1 inches between channel supports at maximum installed design load, including required safety factor. 3. Channels shall comply with ANSI-1008 (latest revision) and ASTM-A569 latest revision). 4. Channels shall provide turned lips at longitudinal edges to hold (lock-in) fasteners. 5. Conduit support channels suspended from conduit hangers shall attach to conduit hangers with treaded connections. Provide a minimum of two hangers (trapeze style) connected to each channel. 6. Non-suspended conduit support channels shall connect to structure fasteners with threaded connectors. D. Fasteners 1. Channel fasteners: a. Channel fasteners shall prelocate and lock into the channel turned lips and channel walls. b. A separate metal strap shall tie each conduit to each channel with conduit channel fasteners. 2. Structure fasteners: a. Structure fasteners for wall and floor mounted conduit attachments shall attach to existing masonry and concrete structures with structure fasteners using drilled, mechanical, expansion shield anchors. b. Structure fasteners for wall and floor mounted conduit attachments shall attach to new masonry and concrete structures with structure fasteners using steel threaded inserts precast into the structures. c. Structure fasteners shall attach to steel structural members with swing-beam clamps, with set-locking screw structure fasteners. Beam clamps shall include integral safety rod, strap or J -hook to secure the clamp to the beam flanges on both sides of the beam. d. Structure fasteners for wall and floor mounted conduit attachments shall attach to wood structural members with flush through-bolted wood beam/wood framing stud structure fasteners. CONDUIT AND WIRE

271 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA e. Structure fasteners for wall mounted conduit attachments shall attach to steel framing studs and steel structural elements with spot welded steel structure fasteners or drilled and bolted structure fasteners. E. Brace Connectors 1. Provide lateral brace connectors to resist horizontal, lateral and vertical movement of suspended conduits during seismic earthquakes. 2. The braces shall connect from each conduit support, attach as close to the conduit as possible, and attach to fixed rigid, nonsuspended building main structural elements with fixed anchoring. 3. Brace attachment connectors and fasteners shall be rigid preformed steel channels or flexible #10 gauge steel hanger wire. 4. Connect and attach the brace connectors to fixed structural elements in the same manner as conduit support hangers. The connection of braces to structural elements shall be independent of the conduit support hanger structure fasteners. 2.3 WIRE AND CABLE A. All wire and cable shall be copper, 600 volt, #12 AWG minimum unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. Conductors #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid. Conductors #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Type of insulation as noted on Drawings as follows: Insulation of conductor connected to circuit protection devices required to be "100%" rated, shall be 90 degree rated insulation: 1. Type THHN/THWN insulation used for #4 AWG and smaller. 2. Type THW/XHHW or THHN/THWN insulation used for #2 AWG and larger. 3. Type THHN insulation used for circuit conductors installed in fluorescent lighting fixture raceways, for conductors connected to the secondary of fluorescent or mercury vapor fixture ballast or other hot locations. 4. Type XHHW or THWN insulation shall be used where conductors are installed in conduit exposed to the outdoor weather. 5. The following color code for branch circuits: Neutral.... White (Tape feeder neutrals with white tape near connections) a. Normal Power 120/208 Volt 480/277 Volt Ground Green Ground Green Phase A Black Phase A Brown Phase B Red Phase B Orange Phase C Blue Phase C Yellow b. Isolated ground insulation shall be green with a longitudinal yellow stripe. c. Emergency power same insulation color as normal power except as follows: 120/208 Volt 480/277 Volt Provide a continuous Provide a continuous stripe on each conductor stripe on each conductor insulation, orange or insulation blue or black, yellow, except ground except ground 6. When individual neutral conductors are shown for each branch circuit, the color code for the neutral conductors shall be as follows: a. 120/208 volt; Phase A - White with Black stripe; Phase B - White with Red stripe; Phase C - White with Blue stripe. CONDUIT AND WIRE

272 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 7. Feeders identified as to phase or leg in each panelboard with printed identifying tape. 8. Fire alarm conductors: Use 600-volt, type THHN/THWN conductors and color-coded per equipment Manufacturer's recommendations and approved and listed for use on fire alarm systems by the State Fire Marshal. 2.4 MC CABLE A. General 1. Metal clad electrical cable type MC, UL listed and labeled; low smoke per IEEE-FT procedure and UL-1685 and Fire stop penetration rated. Rated for installation in environmental air plenums. 2. The cable assembly shall be rated for continuous full load operation in ambient temperatures as follows: a. Dry locations 90 degrees centigrade. b. Wet locations 75 degrees centigrade. 3. The type of MC cable, MC fittings and supports shall be suitable for the conditions of use and the conditions of location of installation, based on the Manufacturer s recommendations and based on applicable Codes. B. Conductors 1. Wire conductors shall be 600 volt 60Hz AC thermoplastic insulated, copper wire conductor. a. Wire sizes smaller than #8 AWG shall be solid conductors. Wire sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded conductors. b. Copper conductor - soft annealed copper, ASTM-B3 or B8. Minimum wire conductor size shall not be less than #12 AWG volt color-coded insulation phase wire conductors volt white insulation neutral wire conductor volt green insulation ground wire conductor. 5. A 100% coverage internal jacket binder tape shall enclose all conductors, located directly under the jacket armor. The binder tape shall provide isolation of movement (reduce friction contact) between the conductors and the metal jacket. 6. The insulation of each wire conductor shall be individually 100% enclosed in a continuous tape. The tape shall provide isolation of movement (reduce friction contact) between individual conductors insulation and between conductor insulation and the internal jacket tape. C. Jacket 1. Interlocking flexible metal armor shall be galvanized steel armor jacket. The armor jacket shall 100% enclose the insulated wire conductors inside the armor jacket. 2. The interior surfaces of fittings shall be continuous and smooth, with a constant interior diameter. Fittings shall provide fully enclosed circular cross section. The interior surfaces of fittings shall be without ridges, burrs irregularities or obstructions. Fittings of the same type shall be of the same uniform weight and thickness. 3. Protective corrosion resistant finish for MC fittings fabricated from steel, shall be as follows: a. clean all metal surfaces (including metal threads) with acid bath pickle prior to coating, to remove dirt, oil and prepare surfaces for galvanizing. b. Hot-dip galvanized zinc coating on all interior and exterior steel surfaces. Minimum finish zinc coating thickness shall not be less than inches. CONDUIT AND WIRE

273 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. Threads shall be hot-dip zinc coated after machine fabrication. d. Exterior metal surfaces shall be finished with clear organic polymer topcoat layer, after galvanizing. e. The inner metal surfaces shall be finished with a lubricating topcoat after galvanizing, to facilitate conductor pulling through the fitting. 4. Threads for MC cable fittings shall be taper-pipe-thread, National Pipe Standards (NPS) and shall comply with ANSI-B Terminal connector fittings shall be provided with a Manufacturer installed, insulating throat bushing inside the fitting. The bushing shall protect the wire conductor insulation from cutting, nicks, and abrasion during conductor installation and electrical load cycling after installation is complete. The bushing shall comply with UL 94V-0 flammability. The bushing shall be visible and provide physical isolation between the jacket metal armor and the internal conductor insulation. 6. Fittings connecting to MC cable with PVC jacket coating, shall be PVC coating to match the cable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SLEEVES A. Sleeves 1. Provide sleeves for raceways and conduit passing through the following construction elements: a. Building structures (i.e., foundations, walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs) with a fire rating exceeding 20 minutes. 2. Sleeves shall extend 1.5 inches above floors, except under floor standing electrical equipment. Sleeves shall be flush with wall ceiling foundations and partitions exposed to public view and extend approximately 0.5 inch past penetration in fire rated construction. Sleeves shall be installed at exact penetration locations and angles to accommodate raceway and conduit routings. 3. Joists, girders, beams, columns or reinforcing steel shall not be cut or weakened. Where construction necessitates the routing of conduit or raceways through structural members, framing or footings, written permission to make such installation shall first be obtained from the Owner s Representative. Such permission will not be granted, however, if any other method of installation is possible. 4. The layout and design of raceways and conduits located in or routed through masonry or reinforced beams or the Owner s Representative shall review walls before any work is performed. All sleeving shall be accomplished according to the instructions of the Owner s Representative and shall be accepted before any concrete is poured. 5. Sleeves, raceways and conduit shall be located to clear steel reinforcing bars in beams. Reinforcing bars in walls shall be offset to clear piping and sleeves. 6. Provide a continuous clearance between the inside of a sleeve and exterior of conduits and raceways passing through the sleeve not less than the following: a. 0.5 inch clearance except as required otherwise. b. 1.0 inch clearance through outside walls below grade. c. 3.0 inch clearance through seismic joints. 7. Sleeves set in fire rated construction shall be caulked between sleeve and building structure, additionally sleeves shall be caulked between the sleeve and the conduits/ raceways passing through the sleeve. The caulking shall be a fireproof sealant, equal to CONDUIT AND WIRE

274 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA the fire rating being penetrated. Clearance between conduits inside of sleeve and exterior of conduit(s) passing through sleeve and between conduits inside the sleeve shall comply with fireproof sealant Manufacturer s recommendations. 8. Sleeve material: a. In fire rated construction; lath and plaster construction: 24 gauge galvanized iron or steel. 3.2 GROUNDING A. Grounding shall be executed in accordance with all applicable Codes and Regulations, both of the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. B. Ground/Bond Conductors 1. Provide an additional, dedicated, green insulation equipment ground/bond wire inside each conduit type as follows. The metal conduit shall not be permitted to serve (function) as the only (exclusive) electrical ground return path: a. FMC - Flexible Metal Conduit. b. LTFMC - Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. c. EMT - Electrical Metal Tubing for branch circuits serving receptacles. 2. The equipment ground/bond wire shall be continuous from the electrical circuit source point of origin to the electrical circuit end termination utilization point as follows: a. Every conduit path containing any length of the above identified conduits. b. Every conduit path connected to any length of the above-identified conduits. 3. The equipment ground/bond wire shall be sized as follows, but in no case smaller than indicated on the Drawings. Install equipment ground/bond wire in each conduit/raceway, with the respective phase conductors: a. Branch Minimum Equipment Circuit Protection Ground Wire Size 15 Amp #12 20 Amp #12 30 to 60 Amp #10 70 to 100 Amp #8 4. Isolated grounds - Raceways containing branch circuit or feeder phase conductors connected to panelboards equipment, or receptacles with isolated grounds or isolated ground bus shall contain a dedicated insulated ground conductor connected to the isolated ground system only. The isolated ground conductor shall be continuous the length of the raceways and connected only to the isolated ground terminals in addition to and independent of the equipment bonding/ ground conductor. The isolated ground conductor shall be sized as indicated above, for equipment ground/bond wire. 5. Splices in ground/bond wires shall be permitted only at the following locations: a. Ground buses with listed and approved ground lugs. 6. Provide ground/bond wire jumpers for conduit fittings with ground lugs, expansion and deflection conduit fittings at conduit fittings connecting between metallic and nonmetallic raceways and to bond metal enclosures to conduit fittings with ground lugs. C. Ground conductors for branch circuit wiring shall be attached at each outlet to the back of the box using drilled and tapped holes and washer head screws, 6-32 or larger. CONDUIT AND WIRE

275 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA D. Each pull box or any other enclosure in which several ground wires are terminated shall be equipped with a ground bus secured to the interior of the enclosure. The bus shall have a separate lug for each ground conductor. No more than one conductor shall be installed per lug. 3.3 CONDUIT A. General 1. The sizes of the conduits for the various circuits shall be as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than the conduit size required by code for the size and quantity of conductors to be installed in the conduit. 2. Conduits shall be installed concealed from view. Install conduits concealed in walls, concealed in/below floors and concealed above ceilings, except as specifically noted otherwise. 3. The following systems shall be considered as circuits 100 volts and less, all other circuits shall be considered to be over 100 volts (power circuits) unless specifically noted otherwise: Fire alarm, energy management control, telephone, public address, data, computer, television and intercom. 4. Conduits shall be provided complete with conduit bends, conduit fittings, outlet boxes, pullboxes, junction boxes, conduit anchors/supports, grounding/bonding for a complete and operating conductor/wire raceway system. 5. Metal and nonmetal conduits shall be provided mechanically continuous between termination connection points. Metal conduit shall be provided electrically continuous between termination connection points. 6. Individual conduit paths and home runs shown on the Drawings shall be maintained as separate individual conduits for each homerun and path. 7. Transitions between conduits constructed of different materials shall be allowed only at outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and equipment enclosures unless specifically indicated otherwise. Provide outlet boxes and junction boxes. 8. Metal conduit terminating to nonmetal enclosures; terminating into metal enclosures with concentric.ring knockouts; terminating into metal enclosures with knockout reducing washers, including but not limited to equipment housings, outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, cable trenches, manholes, shall be provided with a ground/bonding lug integrated with the conduit termination conductor fitting construction, by the fitting Manufacturer. The lug shall provide for connection of a grounding/bonding conductor (insulated or uninsulated). The grounding lug shall be located on the fitting, inside the termination enclosure. 9. The type of conduit, type of conduit fittings, and type of conduit supports and method of conduit installation shall be suitable for the conditions of use and conditions of location of installation based on the Manufacturer s recommendations; based on the applicable codes and based on the requirements of the contract documents. B. RMC Installation Locations RGS, IMC conduits and RGS, IMC fittings shall be installed in the following locations: 1. Interior of buildings, within nine feet of finish floor lines for exposed conduit locations. 2. Exterior of building for exposed conduit locations. 3. Damp or wet locations, exposed or concealed locations. 4. Exposed on roofs. 5. RMC conduit and RMC fittings may be installed in any location where EMT and FMC conduit is permitted to be installed. CONDUIT AND WIRE

276 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA C. EMT Installation Locations EMT conduit and EMT fittings may be installed in the following locations, for circuit conductors operating below 600 volts to ground; locations containing only non-hazardous materials ; only dry locations: 1. Concealed in hollow non masonry, metal stud frame and wood stud frame walls. 2. Concealed above ceilings. 3. Exposed inside interior enclosed crawl spaces. 4. Exposed interior locations placed 9 ft. or higher above finished floors. 5. Exposed in the following dedicated function areas, interior enclosed room locations: a. Indoor enclosed electrical equipment rooms and closets. b. Indoor enclosed data and telecommunication terminal rooms and closets. c. Indoor enclosed HVAC equipment rooms and closets. 6. Any location where FMC is described to be installed, except as the final connection to rotating or vibrating equipment. D. FMC Installation Locations FMC conduit and FMC fittings may be installed in the following locations for circuit conductors operating below 600 volts to ground; locations containing only non-hazardous materials ; only dry, interior locations: 1. Concealed in hollow non-masonry metal stud frame and wood stud frame fully enclosed walls. 2. Concealed above fully enclosed ceiling spaces. 3. FMC conduit shall be installed in continuous lengths between termination points. FMC shall not be spliced or coupled directly to FMC or any other conduit type under any circumstance. 4. The maximum continuous length of FMC that shall be installed between termination end points is 15 feet. Circuits requiring continuous conduit lengths exceeding 15 feet between termination end points shall be installed using either RMC or EMT conduits. FMC lengths shorter than 16 inches are prohibited. 5. The minimum size FMC conduit shall be as shown on the Drawings but not be less than the following: a. FMC lengths of six feet or less, minimum FMC conduit size shall be 0.50 inches. b. FMC lengths exceeding six feet, minimum FMC conduit size shall be 1.0 inches. E. LTFMC Installation Locations LTFMC conduit and LTFMC fittings shall be installed in the following locations for circuit conductors operating below 600 volts to ground; locations containing only non-hazardous materials : 1. Final electrical connection to vibrating or rotating equipment; control and monitoring devices mounted on vibrating and rotating equipment including the following. Minimum conduit length shall not be less than 24 inches: a. Motor, engines, boilers, solenoids, and valves. 2. All locations where exposed flexible conduit connections are required, both indoor and outdoor. 3. Do not install LTFMC located in environmental air plenums. F. Conduit Installation 1. Conduit Supports a. Securely and rigidly support all raceways/conduits from the building structure. Raceways/Conduits shall be supported independent of all piping, air ducts, equipment ceiling hanger wires, and suspended ceiling grid systems. Secure CONDUIT AND WIRE

277 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA conduit to structural element by means of UL listed and approved hangers, fasteners, C channels and pipe clamps. b. Provide conduit supports spaced along the length of the conduit as follows: 1) RMC and EMT conduit, maximum not to exceed 96 inches on center; within 24 inches of each conduit bend and conduit termination location. 2) FMC and LTFMC conduit, maximum not to exceed 24 inches on center; within 6 inches of each conduit bend and conduit termination location. c. Suspended conduit methods: 1) Individual, suspended raceways/conduits separated by more than 12 inches from any other conduit and suspended from ceilings and roofs shall be supported as follows: a) Conduits smaller than 1.5 inches by means of hanger rods or hanger wires. b) Conduits 1.5 inches and larger by means of hanger rods. c) The conduit shall attach to the hangers with pipe clamps. 2) Suspended raceways/conduits positioned within 24 inches of any other conduit shall be grouped and supported by hanger rods using trapeze type conduit support channels ("C" channels). Conduits shall individually attach to common channels side-by-side, with pipe clamps. d. Non-suspended conduit methods: 1) Individual raceway/conduits placed against wall/ceiling/floors, placed inside hollow wall/ceiling construction or structure framing (i.e., dry- wall or plaster hollow wall construction), shall be secured by means of individual pipe clamps and fasteners attached to the framing studs or other structural members and the conduit/ raceway. 2) Provide common C" channel supports for all multiple raceway/conduits placed against vertical or horizontal surfaces and positioned within 24 inches of other raceways/conduits. Attach channels to the framing studs or other structural members. Attach the conduits/raceway individually to common channels, side-by-side, with pipe clamps. 3) The use of toggle bolts is prohibited. e. Conduit rising from floor for motor connection shall be independently supported if extending over 18-inches above floor. Support shall not be to a motor or ductwork, which may transmit vibrations. f. Provide conduit anchoring, conduit support and conduit bracing systems conforming to Earthquake Seismic Zone 4 requirements. The conduit support/ anchoring system capacity shall include the weight of the conduits, conduit fittings, conduit supports and conductors/wires/cables installed in the conduits plus a 300% safety factor. 2. Conduit stubs: a. Branch circuit and telephone conduits turned up from floor at the following locations shall terminate each conduit in a flush conduit coupling at the floor and then extend into partition or to equipment. Refer to Owner s Representative s Drawings for location of walls and partitions. 1) Interior demountable partitions. 2) Below, into or adjacent to equipment not installed directly adjoining to a wall. 3) Up from below the floor into hollow stud frame walls. b. Conduits stubbed into ceiling or floor spaces from outlets for telephone, video, computer/data or television shall be provided with an insulated throat bushing, on the end of each conduit stubout. CONDUIT AND WIRE

278 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA c. Conduit stubouts from outlet boxes and equipment located in hollow stud walls, into ceiling and floor spaces, shall be EMT or RMC conduit. The stubouts shall terminate into the ceiling and floor spaces with a conduit termination connector fitting. d. Empty conduit stubs into building spaces and equipment shall be individually identified with a ID-tag located at each end of the conduit. The ID-tag shall state the origination point and termination point of the respective conduit (i.e., from PNL-A/to Room #121 ; from outlet #24/to outlet #17 in Room #120 ;etc.). 3. Provide openings in building structures for conduit penetrations: a. New construction shall be provided with conduit sleeves, to provide conduit penetrations. b. Existing construction shall be drilled (core drill masonry and concrete) and provide conduit sleeves installed after drilling, to provide conduit penetrations. 4. Conduit bends risers and offsets: a. The minimum bend radius of factory or field fabricated conduit bends shall not be less than the following. The bend radius shall be measured at the surface, inside radius of the conduit wall: 1) FMC and LTFMC conduit - conduit minimum bend radius 12 times the conduit diameter. 2) RMC and EMT conduit minimum bend radius - conduit for power circuits over 100 volts and less than 600 volts, 8 times conduit diameter. Conduit for power circuits over 600 volt, 12 times conduit diameter. Conduit for signal and fiber optic circuits, 10 times conduit diameter. b. Bends and offsets in conduits shall be kept to an absolute minimum. The total summation of all bends and offsets permitted in a conduit segment, occurring between two conduit termination/connection end points, shall not exceed the following, including conduit fittings: 1) RMC and EMT conduit angular degrees 2) FMC and LTFMC conduit angular degrees c. Each field fabricated conduit offset, bend and elbow which are not the standard product of the raceway/conduit Manufacturer shall be mandrel tested. The test shall be conducted after the conduit installation is complete and prior to pulling-in any wire, in the same manner as for underground conduits. d. Factory manufactured angle connector conduit fittings shall be installed in exposed conduit locations only. Installation in locations normally concealed from view shall not be permitted. Not more than one (1) factory manufactured angle connector shall be permitted in any length of conduit between conduit termination end points. 5. Expansion joint, deflection joint and seismic joint fittings. a. Provide a conduit combination expansion/deflection fitting for each conduit, crossing the following elements: 1) At each building or non-building structure seismic joint. 2) At each building on non-building structure expansion joint. 3) At each conduit penetration of a sound-rated wall, floor or ceiling. 6. Provide two locknuts and an insulated throat bushing at each metal conduit terminating at enclosures, including but not limited to outlet boxes, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, switchgear, distribution panels and panelboards. 7. Provide metallic or plastic closure caps on all conduit ends during construction, until installation of conductors in the respective conduit. 8. Conduit run exposed, shall be run at right angles or parallel to the walls or structures. All changes in directions, either horizontally or vertically, shall be made with conduit outlet CONDUIT AND WIRE

279 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA bodies as manufactured by Crouse Hinds, OZ or equal. Conduits run on exposed beams or trelliswork shall be painted to match surrounding surfaces. 9. Rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing shall not be strapped or fastened to equipment subject to vibration or mounted on shock absorbing bases. 10. RMC conduit threads: a. Machine cut threads on RMC conduit required for field fabrication shall comply with NPS and ANSI-B b. The length of bare metal exposed during thread fabrication shall be completely covered by conduit couplings and fittings. Additionally, the thread length shall insure that conduit joints will reach torque tightness and become secure before conduit ends butt together and before conduit ends butt into the shoulders of other conduit fittings. c. Running threads or right/left handed threads shall not be used to connect RMC. 11. Tighten each conduit fittings and fitting appurtenance, to the torque (allowable tolerance 5 percent) value recommended by the fitting Manufacturer and applicable Code. G. Conduit Bodies 1. Conduit bodies shall be installed in exposed conduit locations only or above accessible ceilings. 2. Conduit bodies shall be accessible for removing body cover and pulling wire through the conduit body. 3. Conduit bodies shall not be installed inside enclosed walls. 3.4 WIRE AND CABLE A. Branch circuit and fixture joints for #10 AWG and smaller wire shall be made with ULapproved connectors listed for 600 volts, approved for use with copper wire. Connector to consist of a cone-shaped, expandable coil spring insert, insulated with a nylon shell and 2 wings placed opposite each other to serve as a built-in wrench or shall be molded one-piece as manufactured by 3M-"Scotchlok". B. Branch circuit joints of #8 AWG and larger shall be made with screw pressure connectors made of high strength structural aluminum alloy and UL-approved for use with copper wire as manufactured by Thomas & Betts. Joints shall be insulated with plastic splicing tape, tapered half-lapped and at least the thickness equivalent to 1.5 times the conductor insulation. Tapes shall be fresh and of quality equal to Scotch. C. Use UL listed pulling compound for installation of conductors in conduits. D. Correspond each circuit to the branch number indicated on the panel schedule shown on the Drawings except where departures are approved by the OWNER'S Representative. E. All wiring, including low voltage, shall be installed in conduit. F. Control wiring to conform to the wiring diagrams shown on the mechanical Drawings and the Manufacturer's wiring diagrams. G. Neatly group and lace all wiring in panelboards, motor control centers and terminal cabinets with plastic ties at 3" on centers. Tag all spare conductors. CONDUIT AND WIRE

280 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 3.5 MC CABLE INSTALLATION A. General 1. MC cable shall not be spliced or coupled directly to any other conduit type under any circumstance. 2. MC cable shall not be installed exposed. Where exposed installation occurs, provide a conduit to completely enclose and protect the MC Cable. The inside diameter of the conduit shall be sized 1.6 times the outside diameter of the MC cable. The conduit type and installation methods shall comply with the Contractor Documents. 3. MC cable shall be continuous length between end point terminations, without intermediate splices or junctions. 4. MC cable shall be supported and attached. MC cable supports and attachments shall be the same as contract document requirements for conduit, with the following exceptions: a. Support at not more than 3-foot intervals along the entire length of the MC cable. b. Support within 12 inches of each bend or change of direction. c. Support within 12 inches of each termination entrance. 5. The minimum installed bending radius shall not be less than 8 times the outside diameter of cable assembly, as measured at the inside radius cable jacket surface. 6. Cable lengths of less than 6ft. shall not be permitted. 7. MC cable shall be installed and terminated to comply with Manufacturer s recommendations. B. Permitted Applications 1. MC cable may be provided only for electric power circuits and where complying with all of the following conditions: a. Circuits operating on line to ground 60Hz, AC circuit voltages, exceeding 100 volts and less than 500 volts. b. The full load ampere rating and circuit conductor quantities of the proposed MC cable shall be equal to or greater than the full load ampere rating for the conduit and wire conductors shown on the contract Drawings. c. The electrical circuit voltage drop of the proposed MC cable shall be equal to or less than for the conduit and wire conductor sizes shown on the Contract Drawings. d. The conductor sizes in MC cable shall not be smaller than the conductor sizes described for conduit and wire installations. e. MC cable shall not be permitted on circuits with more than one phase conductor per phase. 2. MC type cable may only be installed in the following locations in areas that do not contain classified hazardous materials (MC cables without PVC jacket): a. Concealed in hollow non-masonry metal stud frame and wood stud frame fully enclosed walls. b. Concealed above fully enclosed ceiling spaces. END OF SECTION / CONDUIT AND WIRE

281 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The purpose of this Section is to specify the Division 26 Contractor s Responsibilities and Participation in the Commissioning Process. B. Developing and Witnessing the Commissioning Process is the responsibility of the Commissioning Authority. Performing the Commissioning is primarily the responsibility of the Division 26 Contractor, with support for start-up, testing, and Commissioning testing the responsibility of the Division 26 Subcontractors. The Commissioning Process does not relieve this Contractor from participation in the process, or diminish the role and obligations to complete all portions of work in a satisfactory and fully operational manner. C. Work of Division 26 includes: 1. Testing and start-up of the electrical equipment 2. Providing qualified Personnel to assist in commissioning tests, including seasonal testing required after the initial Commissioning. 3. Providing equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during the Commissioning Process which fulfill Contract and warranty requirements. 4. Completion and endorsement of pre-functional test checklists to assure that Division 26 equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional testing. 5. Providing operation and maintenance information and As-Built Drawings to the Commissioning Authority for review and verification prior to distribution. 6. Providing training for the systems specified in this Division with coordination by the Commissioning Authority PART 2 RELATED WORK 2.1 ALL TESTING AND START-UP PROCEDURES AND DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED WITHIN DIVISIONS 1, 25 AND 26, INCLUDING LEED COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DESCRIBED IN DIVISION 1. A. Commissioning Procedures that Require Participation of Division 26 Contractors. B. Allow sufficient time before final completion dates so mechanical systems start-up, testing and Commissioning can be accomplished. C. For specified electrical systems and component testing by a third-party Testing Contractor, coordinate with the Commissioning Authority, the scope and schedule of that testing for observation by the Commissioning Authority during the actual testing. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

282 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 TEST EQUIPMENT A. Division 26 shall provide standard and specialized test equipment as necessary to start-up and test the electrical systems. 1. Proprietary test equipment required by the Manufacturer, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the Manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist the Commissioning Authority in the Commissioning Process. PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 WORK PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING A. Complete all phases of the work so the system can be energized, started, tested, and otherwise commissioned. Division 26 has primary start-up responsibilities with obligations to complete systems, including all sub-systems so they are functional. This includes the complete installation of all equipment, materials, raceways, wire terminations, controls, etc., per the Contract Documents and related directives, clarifications, change orders, etc. B. A Commissioning Plan will be developed by the Commissioning Authority. The Commissioning Plan will be developed prior to completion of the installation. This Contractor shall review the Commissioning Plan and comply with the requirements. C. If system modifications or clarifications are incorporated to this and related sections of work, Commissioning of this work will be made at no additional cost to the Owner. If Contractorinitiated system changes have been made that alter the Commissioning process, the Commissioning Authority will notify the Architect, and the Contractor may be obligated to compensate the Commissioner to test the revised product, or confirm the suitability/unsuitability of the substitution or revision. D. Specific Pre-Commissioning Responsibilities of Division 26 are as follows: 1. Normal start-up services required to bring each system into a fully operational state. This includes motor rotational check, lug tightening, control sequences of operation, etc. The Commissioning Authority will not begin the Commissioning process until each system is complete, including normal Contractor start-up and debugging. 2. The Contractor shall perform pre-functional tests on the following equipment and systems. Contractor start-up forms may be substituted for the pre-functional test forms with prior approval by the Commissioning Authority. a. Occupancy motion sensors. b. Dimming controls. 3. Factory start-up services will be provided for key equipment and systems specified in Division 25 and Division 26. This Contractor shall coordinate this work with the Manufacturer and the CA. 4. Commissioning is intended to begin upon completion of a system. Commissioning may proceed prior to the completion of systems and/or sub-systems, if expediting this work is in the best interests of the Owner. Commissioning activities and schedule will be ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

283 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA coordinated with the Contractor. Start of commissioning before system completion will not relieve the Contractor from completing those systems as per the schedule. 4.2 PARTICIPATION IN COMMISSIONING A. Provide Skilled Technicians to start-up and debug all systems within the division of work. These same Technicians shall be made available to assist the Commissioning Authority in completing the Commissioning program as it relates to each system and their technical specialty. Work schedules, time required for testing, etc. will be requested by the Commissioning Authority and coordinated by the Contractor. Contractor will ensure the qualified Technician(s) are available and present during the agreed-upon schedules and of sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments, and/or problem resolutions. B. System problems and discrepancies may require additional Technician time, Commissioning Authority time, redesign and/or reconstruction of systems, and system components. The additional Technician time shall be made available for the subsequent Commissioning periods until the required system performance is obtained. C. The Commissioning Authority reserves the right to judge the appropriateness and qualifications of the Technicians relative to each item of equipment, system and/or sub-system. Qualifications of Technicians include expert knowledge relative to the specific equipment involved, adequate documentation and tools to service/commission the equipment, and an attitude/willingness to work with the Commissioning Authority to get the job done. A liaison or intermediary between the Commissioning Authority and qualified factory representatives does not constitute the availability of a qualified Technician for purposes of this work. 4.3 WORK TO RESOLVE DEFICIENCIES A. In some systems, miss-adjustments, misapplied equipment, and/or deficient performance under varying loads will result in additional work being required to commission the systems. This work will be completed under the direction of the Architect, with input from the Contractor, equipment supplier, and Commissioning Authority. Whereas all members will have input and the opportunity to discuss, debate and work out problems, the Architect/Engineer of Record will have final jurisdiction on the necessary work to be done to achieve performance. B. Corrective work shall be completed in a timely fashion to permit the timely completion of the Commissioning process. Experimentation to render system performance will be permitted. If the Commissioning Authority deems the experimentation work to be ineffective or untimely as it relates to the Commissioning Process, the Commissioning Authority will notify the Architect/Engineer indicating the nature of the problem, expected steps to be taken, and the deadline for completion of activities. If the deadline(s) passes without resolution of the problem, the Owner reserves the right to obtain supplementary services and/or equipment to resolve the problem. Costs incurred to solve the problems in an expeditious manner will be the Contractor s responsibility. ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

284 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 4.4 TRAINING A. This Contractor will be required to participate in the training of the Owner s Engineering and Maintenance Staff for each electrical system and the related components. Training may be conducted in a classroom setting, with system and component documentation and suitable classroom training aids, or in the field with the specific equipment. The type of training will be per the Owner s option. B. Training will be conducted jointly with the Commissioning Authority, the Design Engineers, the equipment vendors, and the Contractor. The Contractor will be responsible for the generic training, as well as instructing the Owner s Staff on the system peculiarities specific to the project. 4.5 SYSTEMS DOCUMENTATION A. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, update Contract Documents to incorporate field changes and revisions to system designs to account for actual constructed configurations. B. In addition to the stated requirements for operation and maintenance data, provide one copy of equipment technical literature, operation and maintenance literature, and Shop Drawings to the Commissioning Authority as soon as they are available. This requirement is for review of these documents prior to distribution of multiple copies for the Owner s final use. END OF SECTION / ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS COMMISSIONING

285 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. Work Included: All labor, materials, appliances, tools, equipment necessary for and incidental to performing all operations in connection with furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section, complete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Examine all other Specification Sections and Drawings for related work required to be included as work under Division General provisions and requirements for electrical work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. General 1. Submit Certification letter from Manufacturers of LED or Lamps and Ballasts and power/driver supplies, (or alternately, Manufacturer's published catalog data) stating/showing the specific LED or lamp, ballast, or power/driver supply combination comply with Manufacturer recommendation and approval for the combined use, shown on the Drawings. 2. Provide complete Manufacturers catalog data information for each light fixture (luminaire), ballast, power/driver supplies, LED or lamps, materials, auxiliary equipment/devices, finishes and photometrics. B. Performance Certification 1. Submit Manufacturer's Certified LED or Lamp and Ballast Tests Report data showing compliance with Contract Document. 2. Submit Manufacturer's letter of Certification for each fixture type, confirming the proposed combination of specific LED or lamp, ballast, power/driver supply and auxiliary components for each light fixture (luminaire) type will function together correctly and perform in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as follows: "The proposed lamp(s), LED or lamp ballast(s), drivers, (where, applicable), lamp sockets and fixture have been tested as an assembly. The proposed fixture products assemblies are certified by the Manufacturer to function within the required temperature, lumen output, electrical characteristics and operational life described in the Contract Documents". C. Light Fixture Samples 1. If requested by the Owner s Representative, provide a sample of each fixture proposed as a substitution for a specified fixture. Sample fixture shall be complete with specified lamps, 3-wire grounding "SO" cord and plug for 120-volt 60Hz, AC plug-in operation. Sample fixtures shall be delivered to the Owner s Representative's office for review, the samples shall be picked up within 10-working days after review comments have been LIGHTING FIXTURES

286 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA received; any samples left beyond this time will be discarded by the Owner s Representative. Decision of Owner s Representative regarding acceptability of any lighting fixture is final. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. Work and Materials shall be in full accordance with the latest Rules and Regulations as follows. The following publications shall be included in the Contract Document requirements. If a conflict occurs between the following publications and any other part of the Contract Documents, the requirements describing the more restrictive provisions shall become the applicable Contract definition: 1. UL Underwriters' Laboratory: a. UL 1572: HID Lighting Fixtures b. UL 1570: Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures c. UL 1029: HID Ballast d. UL 935: Fluorescent Lamp Ballast e. UL 542: Lamp Holders, Starters, and Starter Holders f. UL 8750 and 1598C: Light Emitting Diode LED Equipment for use in Lighting Products and Replacements 2. NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association: a. NEMA LE4: Recessed Luminaries Ceiling Compatibility b. NEMA SSL #1, #3 and #6: Electronic Drivers for LED; LED and Incandescent Lamp Replacement c. NEMA LSD #44, #45, #49 and #51: SSL-Solid State Lighting 3. United States Federal Government: a. FCC Part 18: EMI and RFI emissions limitations. b. EPA: Energy conservation publications and waste disposal regulations. 4. ETL and C.B.M. Certified and Approved. 5. Electrical Installation Standards, National Electrical Contractors' Association: a. NEIS/NECA and IESNA 500: Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems. b. NEIS/NECA and IESNA 501: Recommended Practice for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems c. NEIS/NECA and IESNA - 502: Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems. 6. Illuminating Engineering Society IES (IESNA): a. IES LM41: Photometric and Reporting. b. IES 587: Transient Surge Protection. c. IES LM79:Solid State Lighting (SSL) Testing and Measurement. d. IES LM80: Testing for Lifetime of LED. 7. ANSI-American National Standards Institute: a. ANSI C81 b. ANSI C82 c. ANSI C62.41: Transient Withstand LIGHTING FIXTURES

287 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA d. ANSI C78: Lamps 8. State California Code of Regulations - Title-24 Energy Code PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Complete Fixture 1. Provide light fixtures complete including LED or lamps, ballasts, drivers, lamp holders sockets, housings, ceiling and wall trim "rings" for each ceiling type, mounting and adapter support brackets, diffusers/lenses and outlet boxes. 2. Include an allowance of $ to provide a light fixture for each lighting fixture outlet shown on Drawings without a fixture type designation. B. Specific Fixture Requirements and Fixture Schedule Information 1. The catalog numbers included in the description of the various types of lighting fixtures shall be considered to establish the type or class of the fixture with a particular Manufacturer only. The fixture length, number of lamps and lamp types, component materials, accessories, mounting type, ceiling, wall and install adapters, operation voltage, and all other components required to fulfill the total description of the fixture based on all Drawing information, branch circuits, voltages, Specification information, and shall be included in the Contract requirements regardless of whether or not the catalog number specifically includes these components. 2. Lighting fixtures shall be the types as indicated in fixture schedule on the Drawings and as described in the Specifications. 3. All fixtures of the same fixture type shall be the same Manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. Manufacturer Certification of Operation 1. Lamps and lamp ballasts and power supplies (drivers) shall be recommended and certified by the respective Manufacturer(s), to be "matched" to operate correctly together, within the published characteristics, for efficacy, lamp starting, operating life hours, lumen output, power factor, power input, operating line ampere, sound intensity, and temperature. 2.2 BALLASTS AND POWER SUPPLIES (FOR HID LAMPS AND FLUORESCENT LAMPS AND DRIVER-POWER SUPPLIES FOR LED-SOLID STATE LAMPS) A. General 1. All ballast, power supplies, lighting fixtures assemblies and components shall be ANSI, ETL approved C.B.M. Certified and UL labeled. 2. Ballasts shall provide Class "P" thermal protection. 3. Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 Class-A and NEMA limits as to EMI or RFI and not interferes with normal operation of electrical or electronic data processing equipment. 4. Open circuit voltage, starting voltage, crest voltage and lamp-operating voltage shall comply with requirements of the respective Manufacturer of the installed lamps. 5. Lamp ballasts, power supplies and transformers shall be for use with the specific lamps provided as part of the Contract. LIGHTING FIXTURES

288 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 6. Shall be suitable for use with automatic occupancy motion sensing type switching "onoff" control systems, with multiple "on-off" cycles per hour, on a 24-hours a day basis. Operation shall be without loss of performance in operating characteristics described in the Contract Documents. 7. Fusing a. Shall be independently fused on the incoming line side within the fixture compartment. b. Alternately the ballast Manufacturer may install the equipment fuse inside the ballast/power supply. c. Provide a label next to ballast cover reading: "Ballast (Power Supply) is fused, check fuse prior to relamping". Provide an additional quantity of 10% spare fuses and deliver to Owner s Representative. 8. Ballast sound rating Class-A or better. Where sound-rating classification is not published, the ballast sound rating shall be the best of product manufactured. Ballasts, which are judged by the Owner s Representative to be excessively noisy, shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense with low noise ballasts. 9. Electronic solid-state ballasts and power supplies shall be the product of Manufacturer that has been producing electronic ballasts/power supplies for a minimum of 5- consecutive years prior to the date of the Contract. 10. Shall be designed and supplied to operate on the incoming line voltage system circuits to which the respective light fixtures are connected. 11. Shall not contain any PCB (polychlorinated biphenyl). 12. Power factor shall be not less than 0.90, starting and operating. The input starting transient line input ampere should never exceed lamp normal operating ampere by more than 10%. 13. Ballast and power supply disconnect: a. Lighting Fixture Manufacturer factory installed and prewired inside each light fixture, for lamp-ballast or lamp-driver power supply. b. Shall comply with UL-2459 and CEC/NEC. Shall disconnect (load-break) energized or de-energized ballast/driver from respective line voltage circuit and dimming circuit. UL-94V-0 flame retardant. c. Hot plugable, multi-pole, insulated connectors, with strain relief and finger-safe squeeze-to-release latching function. d. Suitable for available voltage and ampere dimming and non-dimming lampballasts and lamp-power supplies. 14. Ballast and power supplies as manufactured by General Electric, Advance, Philips, Universal, Sylvania/Osram or equal. B. Solid-State Electronic Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 1. Fluorescent ballasts shall be solid-state electronic type ANSI C Ballast shall operate lamps at voltage frequency exceeding 40kHz, without visually detectable flicker, flicker index shall not exceed 3%. Shall deliver lamp Manufacturers normal rated lamp life. 3. Ballast normal operations and life expectancy shall not be affected by lamp failure or sustained open circuit/short circuit. 4. Ballast shall be surge and transient protected to 6000 volts, ANSI-C62.41, Category-A. 5. Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) created by operation on the line (input) side of the ballast shall not exceed 10%. LIGHTING FIXTURES

289 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 6. The ballast shall provide an isolated output to the lamps. Metal ballast case shall be positively grounded to the light fixture metal housing. 7. The ballast shall incorporate transient surge protection to prevent damage to the ballast due to line side transients. 8. The ballast lamp current crest factor shall be 1.7 or less (ratio of peak to RMS current). 9. The Ballast Factor (BF) shall be not less than the following unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. a BF for normal light output. b BF for High light Output (HO) operation. c. 1.0 BF for dimming ballast. 10. Normal rapid start (continuous full filament voltage) Rapid Start - Rapid start ballast shall energize (preheat) the lamp cathode heater filament prior to establishing the lamp arc ignition, normal lamp operation shall occur within 1-second after starting. The ballast shall provide approximately 15,000-lamp start on-off cycles prior to lamp failure. 11. Instant start - Instant start ballast shall energize the lamp with an initial increased voltage to initiate the lamp arc discharge between the unheated (no preheat) lamp cathodes and ensure the lamps start without delay or flashing, eliminate lamp operating power required for cathode heating. Preheating the lamp cathodes shall not be performed by the ballast. The ballast shall control the lamp start on-off cycles to provide approximately 10,000 starts prior to lamp failure. 12. Program Start - Integrated Circuit (IC) program start ballast shall energize (preheat) the lamp cathode heater filament for a programmed time duration prior to transition phase to lamp arc ignition and immediately de-energize the cathode after arc is established and lamp is operational. The ballast shall precisely control the cathode temperature and duration to increase lamp start on-off cycles prior to lamp failure to approximately 35,000 starts. The ballast shall reduce the black-end lamp condition resulting from frequent lamp on-off cycles. The Program Start ballast shall provide Automatic End of Life (EOL) lamp current shut-off, when a lamp fails. 13. DALI ballast, 1-lamp, 2-lamp, 3-lamp, or 4-lamp, dimming and switching capacity. Comply with DALI published control and communication protocol standards. Universal input line voltage operation. D. Dimming Ballasts and Lighting Control System Ballasts 1. General a. The light fixture ballasts shall comply with the recommendations of the Lighting Control System Manufacturer, as to ballast type and Ballast Manufacturer sources. Provide documentation with Shop Drawings certifying compliance with the requirements. b. DALI ballasts shall comply with the recommendations of the DALI Lighting Control System Manufacturer. DALI ballast types and DALI Ballast Manufacturer sources shall comply with the recommendation with the Shop Drawings certifying compliance with these requirements and recommendations. 2. Fluorescent lamp dimming a. One or multi-lamp rated dimming ballast shall be provided for fluorescent lamp dimming systems, as recommended by the Lighting Control System Manufacturer. LIGHTING FIXTURES

290 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA E. Emergency Lighting 1. Light fixtures shown connected to both normal power and external emergency power branch circuits, shall be furnished with separate lamp ballasts for the normal and emergency power circuits. 2. The ballast(s) for the lamps connected to the external emergency branch circuit shall be in a separate wireway isolated and barriered from the ballast(s) for the lamps connected to the normal power branch circuits. The fixture shall be factory labeled "emergency" and "normal" on the respective wireways and ballasts. 2.3 LAMPS A. General 1. Lamps shall be new, of wattage and type indicated. Each fixture or lighting outlet shall be supplied with the proper lamp(s). 2. Lamps shall comply with the characteristics as described in the lamp tables below, except where indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3. Lamps shall comply with limits on mercury and classification as non-hazardous waste as follows: a. Federal EPA Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedures (TCLP). b. State of California Total Threshold Limit Concentration (TTLC). 4. Lamps shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Philips, Osram or Sylvania. B. Incandescent Lamps 1. General-purpose incandescent "A" style lamps shall be inside frosted, medium base for 200 watts and smaller. 2. Reflector lamps shall be PAR-20, PAR-30 or PAR-38 as required, unless otherwise specified in fixture schedule. 3. Incandescent lamps in non-enclosed fixtures and fixtures without lens/ diffuser shall be rated for "open" fixture operation. C. Fluorescent Lamps 1. Linear fluorescent shall be energy saving type and bi-pin operation. Rapid-start, Program Start or instant start as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Compact fluorescent lamps. 3. Average lamp life shall not be less than the following, based on 3 hours "on" operation and 20-minute "off" for each start cycle, when matched in combination with the specific lamp ballast and with the respective light fixture, unless noted otherwise: a. Linear fluorescent 20,000 hours. b. CFL 20,000-hours and as noted in the lamp tables. c. HID as noted in the lamp tables, based on 12-hours "on operation for each start cycle. d. Incandescent as noted in the lamp tables. 2.4 LIGHT FIXTURES (LUMINAIRES) A. General LIGHTING FIXTURES

291 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 1. Lighting fixtures shall have all parts, ballasts, drivers, sockets, support attachments, trim flanges and fittings necessary to complete and properly install the fixture at the indicated installation locations. All fixtures shall be provided with lamps of size and type specified. 2. Ceiling and/or wall surface mounted lighting fixtures shall not have any exposed chase nipples or conduit knockouts visible to view within fixture housing. Lighting fixtures mounted in continuous rows shall have chase nipples or conduit knockouts between lighting fixture housing, but shall not have visible chase nipples/conduit knockouts on the visible ends of the continuous row of lighting fixtures. 3. Where fixture color is indicated to be selected by the Architect and/or Owner s Representative, provide two color chip samples for each color for review. 4. Recessed fixtures with attached junction box shall be provided with a junction box permanently attached to the plaster ring so that the junction box is accessible through the fixture opening when the fixture is removed. Connection between fixture and pull box shall be flexible metal conduit with not less than 16 AWG "AF" or "CF" type fixture rated copper wires, high temperature wire insulation for not less than 600 volts AC. The flexible conduit shall be sufficient length, so that when the fixture is removed, the pullbox is readily accessible. 5. Recessed fixtures shall be Underwriters' Laboratory approved for recessed installation with plaster frame and attached pull box. Lamp enclosure, reflectors and finish wiring shall not be installed until plastering is completed. Exposed finish trim shall not be installed until finish painting of the adjacent surface is completed. 6. The fixture shall bear Underwriters' Laboratory label of approval for the wattage and installation indicated. 7. Light fixtures installed outdoors, in damp or wet locations shall be UL labeled for said location as "damp-location" and "wet-location" for the respective installation location. 8. Fixtures in contact with thermal/building insulation shall be UL listed and rated for direct contact installation in thermal insulation systems. 9. Lamp auxiliary support brackets shall be heat-resistant, non-dielectric. Alternatively, metal auxiliary lamp support brackets shall be electrically isolated from the fixture, to prevent glass decomposition. 10. Lighting fixtures installed in masonry and/or concrete construction. The fixture housing shall be rated for "concrete-pour" installation location. 11. Provide a permanent label inside each light fixture stating the following relamping information. Not less than inch high black alphanumeric characters on white background. "Replacement lamp(s) installed in this light fixture must comply with the following criteria: *: CRI *: Lamp Watts *: CCT-K *: Lamp Lumens Only lamp rated * type lamp ballast shall be installed in this fixture." *Insert the value required for the specific lamp required by the Contract Documents for each light fixture. B. Lens and Diffusers 1. Acrylic plastic or Plexiglas for the light fixture diffusers or fixture lenses shall be 100% virgin material. LIGHTING FIXTURES

292 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2. Thickness of not less than inch, as measured at the "THINIST" portion on the diffuser or lens. However, thickness shall be increased to sufficient construction and camber to prevent the lens and diffusers from having any noticeable sag over the entire normal life of the installation. 3. Diffusers shall be formed from cast sheet by a vacuum and/or pressure technique. 4. Lighting fixtures containing lamps with dichroic reflectors and light fixtures with nondichroic lens/diffuser shall be rated for high temperature lamp operations resulting from lamp heat redirected (reflected) back into the fixture. C. Fixture/Luminaire Internal Wiring 1. Provide wiring between fluorescent lamp holders and associated operating and starting equipment. Provide ballasts/transformers inside lighting fixture. 2. Where there are two or more fluorescent lamps in a single luminaire, and multiple level intensity control is indicted on Specifications or Drawings, multiple-lamp ballasts shall be used to the greatest extent possible and the following tandem wiring configurations shall apply: a. If "inboard-outboard" wiring or multi-intensity light switching controls are specified for (odd-quantity) multi-lamp luminaires, then the two outboard lamps shall be connected to a single 2-lamp ballast within each luminaire. The inboard lamps of two adjacent luminaires shall be tandem wired, that is, connected to a 2- lamp ballast within one of the luminaires. b. A 1-lamp ballast may be used if a luminaire with ballast is separated by more than 10-feet from any other same type luminaire with a ballast or if the nearest luminaire is on another control circuit. Otherwise, a lamp in one luminaire shall be tandem wired, that is, connected to a multi-lamp ballast in another luminaire. 3. Wire insulation for ballast/lamps employing igniters, shall be rated and UL listed for the igniter pulse voltage. 4. Light fixture internal lamp sockets; installation of lamp sockets and ballasts; grounding of lamp sockets and ballasts; and wiring connections, shall all comply with the recommendations of Ballast Manufacturer and Lighting Control System Manufacturer. D. Lamp Holders (Sockets) and Supports 1. Provide fluorescent luminaire lamp sockets that are white, constructed of high temperature heat-resistant plastic or ceramic/porcelain. 2. When electronic solid-state ballasts are provided, fluorescent lamp sockets for 4-feet-0- inches lamps shall be of the "knife edge" type. The lamp sockets providing the tightest electrical connection shall be furnished. 3. Lamp supports shall be used as recommended by Lamp Manufacturer. 4. Rigidly and securely attach lamp holder to the luminaire enclosure. 5. Provide lamp holders and sockets suitable for specified lamps, and position the lamps in optically correct spacing and relationship to lenses, reflectors, filters, and baffles. 6. Lamp holder location shall provide properly located starting aid, as specified by the Lamp Manufacturer. 7. Lamp sockets in fixtures shall be compatible with the respective specified lamp(s), as recommended by the Lamp Manufacturer and shall provide specified lamp operational performance. 8. Provide horizontal position (±15-degree) lamp and lamp socket to automatically ensure lamp position, for lamps requiring horizontal only operation lamps, to ensure correct horizontal lamp install position. LIGHTING FIXTURES

293 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 9. Lamp sockets shall be rated for not less than actual volts of the igniter starting of the lamp. 2.5 SOLID STATE LIGHTING (SSL), LIGHT EMITTING DIODES (LED) LAMPS, POWER SUPPLIES, AND LIGHT FIXTURES (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. General 1. Solid State LED light source (lamps), related control equipment (driver-power supply), and luminaire (light fixture) optics for light output distribution. 2. Shall comply with the US-DOE Energy Star Program for SSL-LED. Submit documentation with Shop Drawings. 3. Shall comply with the latest revision IESNA LM-79 and LM-80. Submit documentation with Shop Drawings. 4. SSL chromaticity shall comply with latest revision NEMA and ANSI C Submit documentation with Shop Drawings. 5. Submit with Shop Drawings two samples of each light fixture type employing SSL, with prewired 120 volt, 60Hz AC SO cord and plug-in cap. B. LED Lamps 1. Lamp lumen output and overall efficiency shall be based on the LED lamps installed in specified fixture and ambient operating temperature. 2. Lamp Color Rendition Index (CRI) shall equal or exceed CRI 80, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 3. Lamp color output shall be 4000-degree K ( 100K), unless noted otherwise on Drawings. 4. CRI and lamp color temperature shall be same for all light fixtures of the same fixture type. C. LED Power Supply (driver) 1. Combination of power supply and SSL lamp shall be tested and certified by respective Manufacturers for performance and proper operation. 2. Provide dimming type driver where indicated on Drawings. Driver and dimming equipment shall be tested and certified by respective Manufactures for performance and proper operation. D. Self-contained LED Lamp and Driver, integral Screw-Base and/or Pin-Connect, replacement assembly for incandescent lamps. 1. Shall be dimmable. Dimmer and lamp shall be certified by respective Manufacturers for compatible correct operation with each other. 2. Optical system and operating temperature thermal performance shall be compatible with light fixture. 3. Comply with latest revisions of NEMA LSD-49 and SSL-6. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LIGHT FIXTURE INSTALLATION LIGHTING FIXTURES

294 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA A. General 1. The CONTRACTOR shall verify actual ceiling and wall construction types as defined on the Architectural Drawings and furnish all lighting fixtures with the correct mounting devices, trim rings, brackets whether or not such variations are indicated by fixture catalog number. The CONTRACTOR shall verify depth of all recessed lighting fixtures with Architectural Drawings prior to ordering fixtures. Any discrepancies that would cause recessed lighting fixtures not to fit into ceiling shall be reported to the Owner s Representative prior to release of order to the supplier of the fixtures. 2. On acoustical tile ceilings, fixture outlets shall be accurately located in the center, at the intersection of the four corners or at the center of the joints of two tiles. 3. The Contractor shall aim the exterior adjustable lighting fixtures after dark in the presence of, and at a time convenient to the Owner s Representative. 4. Fixtures shall be ordered and furnished to operate correctly on the branch circuit voltage connected to the respective fixture as shown on the Site Plan and Floor Plan Electrical Drawings. The voltages shown on the fixture schedule are for generic fixture information only. 5. Install and connect lighting fixtures to the circuits and control sequences indicated on the Drawings and to comply with respective Manufacturer's instructions/recommendations. 6. Lighting fixtures in building interstitial spaces, in mechanical plumbing and electrical spaces/rooms, are shown in their approximate locations. Do not install lighting outlets or light fixtures until the mechanical, plumbing and electrical equipment/pipes/ductwork are installed; then adjust and install lighting in revised clear (non-interfering) locations to provide best even-illumination. Coordinate the locations with all other trades prior to lighting installation. B. Lighting fixtures installed in ceiling support grids - suspended lay-in "T-bar" and concealed spline ceilings. 1. Provide two seismic clips at opposite ends of each recessed light fixture, the clip shall connect to the ceiling grid main runners and the light fixture. The light fixture with seismic clips and ceiling grid runner connections shall resist a horizontal seismic force equal to the total weight of the light fixture assembly. 2. Each light fixture weighing 40-pounds or less and where the respective ceiling grid system is "heavy duty" type, shall be suspended directly from the ceiling grid or shall be suspended independent of the ceiling grid support system as approved by the AHJ. Each light fixture weighing more than 40-pounds or where the ceiling grid system is not a "heavy duty" type shall be supported independent of the ceiling grid and independent of ceiling grid support system. 3. Each light fixture supported independent of the ceiling grid system shall be supported with a minimum of four taut independent support wires, one wire at each fixture corner. 4. Each light fixture supported directly from the ceiling grid or ceiling grid support system shall be additionally connected with a minimum of two independent slack safety support wires. One wire at each opposite diagonal fixture corner. Each 3-feet by 3-feet and larger light fixture shall be supported in the same manner, except provide a minimum of four independent slack safety wires, one at each fixture corner. 5. Light fixtures surface mounted to a suspended ceiling shall be installed with a 1½-inch steel "C" channel which spans across and above a minimum of two parallel main ceiling grid "runners" and concealed above the ceiling. Each channel or angle member shall be provided with a minimum of two threaded studs for attaching to the fixture housing through the lay-in ceiling tile. Two steel "C" channel members shall be installed LIGHTING FIXTURES

295 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA for each 4-feet (or smaller) fixture. Install the channels within 6-inches of each end of the light fixture to span a minimum of two ceiling grid parallel main runners. Provide two seismic clips connecting the ceiling grid main runners to each steel "C" channel. Provide a not less than two taut independent support wires connecting to each channel. Bolt the light fixtures to the threaded studs on the channels or angles, to support the light fixture tight to the ceiling surface. C. Fixture Supports 1. The support wires for light fixture support shall be 12-gauge steel (minimum). The wires including their building and light fixture attachments shall provide support capacity of not less than four times the weight of the light fixture assembly. Provide additional light fixture support wires and building anchors to meet these requirements, as part of the Contract. The support wires shall be anchored to the building structural elements above the ceiling. 2. Pendant mounting fixtures shall be supplied with swivel hangers. Fixtures shall swing in any direction a minimum of 45 degrees of gravity, position. Fixtures shall have special stem lengths to give the mounting height indicated on the Drawings. Stem to be single continuous piece without coupling, and to be finished the same color as the canopy and the fixture, unless otherwise noted. The Contractor shall check all lock nuts and set screws to rigidly secure the swivel socket to the stem, and the stem to the outlet box. Fixtures shall be plumb and vertical. Where obstructions occur restricting 45-degrees free-swing of fixtures, the fixtures shall be "guy" wired to prevent fixtures from striking obstructions. The Owner s Representative shall approve method of guying. Swinging fixtures shall have an additional safety hanger cable attached to the structure and the fixture at each support, with the capacity of supporting four times the vertical weight of the light fixture assembly. 3. Suspended fixtures weighing in excess of 40-pounds shall be supported independently of the fixture outlet box. Provide "air craft" (minimum 12 gauge) steel hanger cable for suspended fixtures route cable concealed or in pendant where possible. Each cable attachments shall support four times the weight of the fixture assembly. Securely attach the cable to the building structure. 4. Surface mounted fixtures installed on drywall or plaster ceilings and weighing less than 40-pounds may be supported from outlet box. Provide structural supports above drywall or plaster ceilings for installation of fixtures weighing more than 40-pounds and secure fixture to structural supports. The use of toggle bolts is prohibited. D. Recessed Lighting Fixtures - Fire Rated Building Surfaces 1. Lighting fixtures recessed in ceiling or wall which has a fire resistive rating of 1-hour or more shall be enclosed in a fully enclosed backbox (except over fixture lens/diffuser). The material used to fabricate the "enclosed backbox" shall have a fire rating equal to that of the respective ceiling or wall. 2. The space from the fixture to the box enclosure shall be a minimum of 3-inches. 3. The backbox shall be concealed behind the fire rated ceiling and wall finish surface. The light fixture shall be provided with lamp ballast rated for (normal light output) operation in a "high" ambient temperature. 3.2 LAMPS LIGHTING FIXTURES

296 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA A. Fluorescent and HID lamps controlled by dimming equipment shall be operated (aged) for 100- continuous hours without interruption, at 100% full lumen output prior to occupancy of the building by the Owner. B. Lamps shall be the type and Manufacturer as recommended by the Dimming System Manufacturer. C. Install all lamps in each light fixture. D. Lamp and light fixture use during construction: 1. All lamps in lighting fixtures that have been operated (ON) for a total of more than 300- hours prior to final completion of the Contract Notice of Completion shall be relamped by the Contractor. Remove the existing lamps with more than 300-hours of illuminated operation and provide new lamps of the type required by the Contract Documents, install lamps in respective light fixtures, typical for the following lamp types: a. Linear fluorescent. b. Compact fluorescent (CFL). c. H.I.D. d. Incandescent. e. LED 3.3 LENS AND DIFFUSERS Lens, diffusers, internal reflectors shall be completely cleaned of all dust, dirt and fingerprints after the installation of the light fixtures and lamps, and after all trades have completed work and prior to occupancy of the facility by the Owner. 3.4 BALLASTS A. Ballasts remote from the lighting fixture, mounted as shown on the Drawings and designed for remote operation. Additional wiring and conduit shall be provided whether shown on the Drawing or not, between lighting fixture and remote Ballasts with required quantity of "THHN" wire installed in conduit to operate said fixture(s). B. Provide proper type and quantity of conductors with conduit system for proper operation of dimming system, whether or not shown on Drawings. 3.6 COMMISSIONING LIGHTING FIXTURES (ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS) A. General 1. Verify correct lighting control configurations and operation in each room. 2. Simulate normal source power failure by "opening" (turn off) building main service disconnect and verify connections and operation of each emergency lighting fixture. 3. Confirm "EXIT" sign directional arrows are visible in each "EXIT" sign. 4. Verify light fixture support-hangers, ceiling grid clips and seismic restraints comply with the Contract Documents. LIGHTING FIXTURES

297 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 5. Remove protective shipping/installation shields on fixtures. Verify fixtures and lamps are clean and free of construction debris. Clean light fixtures found to be contaminated or dirty. 6. Setup, program, and function test lighting control systems to perform each of the indicated control functions, area/room zones and sequences. 7. Provide aiming, directional adjustment of light fixtures, both indoor and outdoor. Aiming shall comply with Manufacturer s aiming diagrams, and as directed by Owner s Representative. B. Sample spot-checks in each room the following lighting fixture information: 1. Lamp type and performance data. 2. Ballast type and performance data. 3. Combined lamp/ballast certification of performance and compatibility by respective Manufacturer. 4. Verify instructional signage is placed inside each lighting fixture in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION / LIGHTING FIXTURES

298 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA SECTION ACCESS CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SITE CONDITIONS A. Note that any given site s conditions will vary significantly from location to location, floor to floor, and time to time; various working conditions exist, but generally the areas are office spaces and may be occupied by City employees and the Public; environmental conditions will vary for each location. B. Inspect each site prior to providing subsequent quotations to ensure that you have factored in all of the requirements. C. Your submission of a bid constitutes acknowledgment of the site conditions requirements and that you have incorporated this condition into your bid. D. Installation equipment, materials, and product will ONLY be allowed to be kept in specified areas. Hallways, office areas lobbies etc. are not suitable for storage and the City will NOT be held liable for missing or stolen equipment. E. The Contractor will exercise reasonable care to avoid damaging City facilities and is responsible for timely repair of damage to City facilities due to carelessness of their workmen. The Contractor must immediately report to the City any damage to the facility that may exist or may occur during the occupancy of the quarters. F. At the end of each shift or workday, Contractor will be required to remove trash, debris, spent reels, and all other refuse related to this installation and at a minimum broom clean work areas, Contractors are to supply their own tools and equipment, especially brooms, dustpans, ladders etc. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor must remove his tools, equipment and all rubbish and debris from the premises and must leave the premises clean and neat. G. The Contractor will obtain the City s permission before cutting into or through any part of the building structure such as beams, girders, concrete, or tile floors, partitions and ceilings. H. Any work that will cause noticeable dust near the work area, e.g. indoor core-boring, contractor must provide protection to prevent dust from migrating from the work area into other areas of the building e.g. provide a temporary structure/enclosure is to be erected to contain all indoor coreboring locations. Timely cleanup of debris related to boring is the responsibility of the contractor. Work area is to be cleaned and returned to an as found condition. This will include but not be limited to water control and abatement, floor washing, vacuuming, carpet cleaning, furniture dusting, furniture cleaning and furniture washing by a professional cleaning service as needed. 1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS: A. The cabling system described in this specification is derived in part from the recommendations made in industry standard documents. The referenced documents below, or their latest revisions, ACCESS CONTROL

299 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA are incorporated herein by reference. 1. The Data Drop Specification, associated drawings 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 3. TIA/TSB-140, Additional Guidelines For Field-Testing Length, Loss And Polarity Of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2-1, Performance Specification for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 7. ANSI/J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 8. Building Industries Consulting Services International (BICSI) Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 10th edition 9. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) 2002 B. Note, that in the event a conflict between applicable documents, the order of the list above shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving conflicts. C. Note that in the event that a conflict between this document and any of the documents listed above are in conflict, the more stringent requirement shall apply. The vendor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when developing the proposal for installation. 1.3 MATERIALS: A. Please refer to attachment for listing of access control related products. B. Project plan and/or door schedule will provide detail identifying applicable door hardware. C. Access control composite cable: Honeywell Genesis Series Cable 3196 four individually jacketed plenum cables, with an overall jacket. NO substitutions on this procurement, and NO alternate bids will be considered. D. Copper: Furnish only Belden category 6 plenum rated blue for data and white for voice cabling for use on this procurement; there are NO substitutions on this procurement, and NO alternate bids will be considered. E. Fiber: Furnish only Honeywell Genesis Series 3196 access control composite plenum cable with jacket and an overall jacket; there are NO substitutions on this procurement, and NO alternate bids will be considered. F. City will accept only first quality New equipment and materials for installation under this bid. Equipment and materials must not be used, pre-owned, returned, remanufactured, reconditioned or have had its serial numbers registered as sold to a previous customer or vendor. The City reserves the right to verify origin and condition of all equipment and materials at any time. G. Furnish connectivity items including without limitation modular jacks, inserts, splices, modular patch panels, and the like, which are fully compatible with and meet or better then manufactures ACCESS CONTROL

300 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA listed above specifications and warranty requirements. H. Furnish all other components required to complete the project that meet or better then manufactures listed above requirements to ensure that the warranty is not voided and is intact. I. If awarded, when providing quotes on actual jobs, if items are not listed on the Planet Bid Line Items, show manufacturer s list price, so we can apply your quoted discount and calculate item price to the City. Pricing should include consumables, such as screws, washers, etc. necessary to complete the requirements of the given jobs, in all subsequent quotations. 1.4 CABLING: A. Shall include but not be limited to, cabling (e.g. Access Control composite, CAT 6, 25/50/100 pair voice cable etc.), patch panels, voice and data outlets, conduit, equipment racks and ladders, 66 and 110 punch down block, testing, libeling and documenting. B. Perform work in strict compliance with all applicable specifications listed in section 2 above. C. Contractor will adhere to any applicable Federal, State and Local laws, codes and regulations. D. The City s buildings have a wide variation of ages and construction methods, so cable routes transition through various spaces such as, but not limited to, hard-lid and suspended ceilings, under floors, through walls of various construction. Cabling must be routed efficiently, but also neatly, using existing cable routes. E. Ensure that the allowable bend radius specified for the category 6 cable is not exceeded. F. Coil cable, as appropriate, in either the box at the termination point or the ceiling above or below the drop location. G. Maintain the cable jacket as close as reasonably possible to the termination point. H. Avoid cable splices unless absolutely necessary. City must give written approval for any splicing and reserves the right to reject any splicing request. If splicing is allowed, Contractor will ensure that any required cable splices are in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. I. Support cable bundles with a J-hook or trapeze system for all horizontal cables at four foot intervals maximum; ensure that cables do not rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. J. Ensure that cable is installed above all fire sprinklers; not attached to any ancillary equipment or hardware; does not interfere with any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices; is not attached to ceiling grid or lighting support wires. K. Install clips to properly support the cabling. L. Ensure that 4 minimum diameter conduits are used in all closets. M. Ensure that all data backbone conduits are located adjacent to the racks. N. Ensure that all voice conduits are located adjacent to the voice termination fields. ACCESS CONTROL

301 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA O. Provide ladders and wall mount management rings to ensure proper support and dress cables from conduits to racks and frames. P. Contractor shall not exceed the recommended pulling tension of the cable manufacturer. Any cable that exhibits evidence of cuts, crimps, severe abrasions, and damage due to exceeding the manufacturer s specified pulling tension shall be replaced at the contractor s expense. Q. The contractor shall install, dress, and terminate all station cabling in a professional manner, using practices of good craftsmanship. R. Where communications cabling must cross power cables/conduits, they shall cross at right angles (90-degrees) to the power runs. A 12-inch minimum separation between power cables/conduits and communications cabling shall be maintained when following the same route. S. Grounding of all equipment racks shall be installed in accordance with all manufacturer s specifications and recommendations, the National Electrical Code, and accepted industry standards for grounding communications cable and ancillary devices T. All work must be approved and coordinated by the IS Manager or his/her designate. Any work that has a potential to disrupt normal City operations, shall be scheduled and performed so as to minimize work interruptions, including performing work after-hours on holidays and/or weekends. 1.5 TERMINATING: A. Terminate the connections all work areas, other than the Communications room, with category 6, RJ45 modular inserts that have data inserts that are blue in color and the voice inserts that are white in color. B. Access control; low voltage, distributed network, and signal cabling must properly terminate into manufacturer provided removable connectors. C. Terminate the category 6 cable, in the Communications room, on the new 48-port patch panels. 1.6 ACCESS CONTROL A. The access control system is an integrated solution that consists of hardware and software designed to control entry into selected areas and manage movement of people/vehicles within. The system is designed to increase security by defining access permissions based on area and time for each user and maintaining a log of all events. B. All access control work to be completed by authorized Sielox partners. C. Components of an access control system: 1. Software: Sielox Pinnacle 2. Electromechanical Hardware: see project plans and/or door schedule a. Electric lock devices 1) Primarily standardized on Securitron or SDC maglocks 2) TM9 and PB2 devices required for maglock installations b. Parking barriers and gates c. Turnstiles ACCESS CONTROL

302 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA d. Secure thresholds and other points of controlled access 3. Electronic Hardware a. Controllers: Sielox AC-1700 b. Contactless readers: HID c. Request to Exit sensors d. Biometric devices 4. System Users a. Operators b. Installers c. Users d. Visitors e. Vehicles 1.7 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. The installation requirements that are contained in this section of the document are to be followed when installing the AC-1700 products. 1. UL Listed Power Supply a. The AC-1700 must be powered with a UL listed power supply with a visible AC indicator. All interconnecting devices are to be powered by UL listed power limited power supplies. 2. Electrical Connections a. The AC-1700L and AC-1700S must be installed within the protected premise in accordance with the National Electric Code (NFPA70). 3. Power Limited Connections a. Those connections not designated as Power Limited must be wired according to Class 1 wiring methods with ¼ wire separation. 4. Primary Voltage Restrictions a. Voltages greater than 30V AC or greater than 42.4V DC shall not enter the ULapproved enclosures listed in this document. 5. Grounding a. All enclosures shall be grounded using local and national code requirements. 6. AC-1700 Power Outlet Requirement a. The AC-1700 power supply must NOT be plugged into a switched power outlet. The power outlet that the AC-1700 power supply plugs into must be hard wired to always be powered on. 7. AC-1700 Grounding Procedure a. The AC-1700 enclosure (p/n ) is grounded by connecting the drain wire of the power cable (that connects the DC power supply of the AC-1700) to the enclosure at the entrance of the cable to the enclosure. Then you connect the other side of the drain wire to the AC ground terminal inside the power supply. 8. Selecting Cable a. There are several considerations regarding wiring: recommended cabling, cable installation, supervised distributed network wiring, and electro-magnetic interference (EMI). b. Shielded Belden cables are required for reader and distributed network cabling. c. Sielox recommends that all AC-1700 wiring be installed in conduit. Install conduit in accordance with national and local codes. If conduit is not practical and not required under UL standards, ensure that wiring is concealed. Take extra care not to damage the cable insulation or shielding. ACCESS CONTROL

303 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 9. Shielding a. All cables that are to be used with the AC-1700 shall be shielded. The shields of these cables shall be terminated to an earth ground on one side of the cable only. Failure to properly terminate the shielding can result in faulty operation of the equipment. Sielox, LLC. shall not be liable for improper operation of the AC-1700 due to improper shielding and or unrecognized cable types. 10. Static Protection a. The AC-1700 is susceptible to static electricity. Always ground yourself to the AC Enclosure using an ANSI/ESD S compliant grounding strap. All modules and backplanes shall be left in their respective anti-static bags until their installation. 11. Sielox provides 2 types of enclosures: a. Large Enclosure (p/n ) up to 8 doors (Four AC-1700) 1) Dimensions: 16" x 20 x 3.5" (40.64 cm x cm x 8.89 cm) b. Small Enclosure (p/n ) 2 doors (One AC-1700) 1) Dimensions:12" x 12" x 3.5" (30.48 cm x cm x 8.89 cm) 12. To install the Sielox enclosures, perform the following procedure: a. Position the enclosure or template at the desired installation location and mark the four keyhole slot locations for mounting. b. Install the applicable mounting fasteners such as wood screws, molly bolts, or masonry fasteners, but do not tighten them completely. c. Position the enclosure on the four fasteners and tighten them completely. d. Install the conduit, if not already completed. e. Install a grounding lug to the Enclosure; ensure that the lug is terminated to an earth ground. f. Clean any debris from the enclosure. 13. Installing a Tamper Switch a. A Tamper Switch mounting channel is available in the lower right hand corner of the large enclosure (p/n ) or in the lower right hand corner of the small enclosure (p/n ). The switch provided by Sielox is to be installed in this mounting channel. b. The Tamper Switch must be connected to an Input of an installed controller. This input shall be configured as normally closed with supervision. Two supervisory resistors (5.1KOhm) shall be inserted in the wiring from the switch to the terminal controller, one across the contact of the switch, the other in the signal data line to the controller. When configured and connected in this way, the controller will properly report an Input Active event when the enclosure door is open and Input Secure when the door is closed. c. An Input Cut or Input Shorted status will be reported if the switch or supervision resistors are not properly assembled and connected. 14. Communications a. The AC-1700 controller, when configured as a Main Controller (MC), communicates directly to a Pinnacle Hardware Server via Ethernet. b. The AC-1700 when configured as a Terminal Controller (TC), communicates to an AC-1700 Main Controller via RS-485. c. To configure the AC-1700 to be a Main Controller or Terminal Controller see DIP switch settings. Attachment provided. 15. The Main Controller (MC) is connected to the Pinnacle Hardware Server through the Ethernet. It also has an on board Terminal Controller, TC-1. The MC supports up to 15 ACCESS CONTROL

304 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA additional TC s which are connected via RS-485 and require unique addresses 16. Install the AC-1700 board on the standoffs and secure it with 4 screws included in the board package. (if using the POE module add the spacers provided in the AC-POE packaging) 17. Repeat the procedure to all boards. 18. Connecting signal cables a. To connect signal cables to any reader, door strike, output, input, request-to-exit and door switch. Follow these procedures: 1) Pull signal cables through the Sielox Enclosure. 2) When connecting these cables to the AC-1700 reader, input or output modules, form a cable bundle using plastic cable ties (Tie wraps). 3) Arrange conductors so that they split out at the right angles from the bundle. Allow enough slack so that the enclosure door can shut easily without pinching the cable bundle. 4) Strip ¼ inch of insulation from each conductor that inserts into a connector block. 5) Insert the stripped conductors into respective removable connectors and tighten set screws. 6) Verify cable connections. 7) Insert removable connectors on the appropriate module fixed connector. 1.8 SAMPLE DRAWINGS A. Sample wiring, B. T-REX exit sensor required when installing magnetic locks. C. Optional alarm interface identified on diagram D. Legacy RS232 and 485 communication identified for reference only, may be present at some locations, but not an option for new installs. ACCESS CONTROL

305 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA E. Sample conduit 1. Unsecured side ACCESS CONTROL

306 CITY OF ANAHEIM, HOUSING AUTHORITY & WORKPLACE, ANAHEIM, CA 2. Secured side ACCESS CONTROL